Transmission repetition for wireless communication

ABSTRACT

A base station and/or a wireless device may communicate using a plurality of transmission beams. Multiple transmission beams may be used for transmission such that a message may be sent via different transmission beams. Multiple transmission beams may be used for sending multiple repetitions of the message or for sending different portions of the message.

CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

This application claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 63/056,129, filed on Jul. 24, 2020. The above-referenced application is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.

BACKGROUND

A plurality of repetitions of a message are sent to one or more communication devices. The repetitions of the message may be sent via a plurality of wireless resources.

SUMMARY

The following summary presents a simplified summary of certain features. The summary is not an extensive overview and is not intended to identify key or critical elements.

Signal transmissions (e.g., uplink transmissions) may be sent via transmission beams. A plurality of transmission beams may be used for uplink transmissions (e.g., repetitions of an uplink message, or portions of an uplink message). A message (e.g., from a base station) may indicate the plurality of transmission beams to be used. For example, the message may include a plurality of fields, with each field indicating a corresponding transmission beam. Spatial diversity facilitated by the use of multiple transmission beams may provide advantages such as improved signal reliability.

These and other features and advantages are described in greater detail below.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

Some features are shown by way of example, and not by limitation, in the accompanying drawings. In the drawings, like numerals reference similar elements.

FIG. 1A and FIG. 1B show example communication networks.

FIG. 2A shows an example user plane.

FIG. 2B shows an example control plane configuration.

FIG. 3 shows example of protocol layers.

FIG. 4A shows an example downlink data flow for a user plane configuration.

FIG. 4B shows an example format of a Medium Access Control (MAC) subheader in a MAC

Protocol Data Unit (PDU).

FIG. 5A shows an example mapping for downlink channels.

FIG. 5B shows an example mapping for uplink channels.

FIG. 6 shows example radio resource control (RRC) states and RRC state transitions.

FIG. 7 shows an example configuration of a frame.

FIG. 8 shows an example resource configuration of one or more carriers.

FIG. 9 shows an example configuration of bandwidth parts (BWPs).

FIG. 10A shows example carrier aggregation configurations based on component carriers.

FIG. 10B shows example group of cells.

FIG. 11A shows an example mapping of one or more synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel (SS/PBCH) blocks.

FIG. 11B shows an example mapping of one or more channel state information reference signals (CSI-RSs).

FIG. 12A shows examples of downlink beam management procedures.

FIG. 12B shows examples of uplink beam management procedures.

FIG. 13A shows an example four-step random access procedure.

FIG. 13B shows an example two-step random access procedure.

FIG. 13C shows an example two-step random access procedure.

FIG. 14A shows an example of control resource set (CORESET) configurations.

FIG. 14B shows an example of a control channel element to resource element group (CCE-to-REG) mapping.

FIG. 15A shows an example of communications between a wireless device and a base station.

FIG. 15B shows example elements of a computing device that may be used to implement any of the various devices described herein.

FIG. 16A, FIG. 16B, FIG. 16C, and FIG. 16D show examples of uplink and downlink signal transmission.

FIG. 17 shown an example beam management for transmission repetition.

FIG. 18 shows an example beam management for transmission.

FIG. 19 shows an example transmission power determination for transmission repetition.

FIG. 20 shows an example of transmission power determination.

FIG. 21A, FIG. 21B, and FIG. 21C show example configurations of TCI states associated with TCI codepoints and/or CORESETs.

FIG. 22 shows example uplink repetition schemes for transmission of a transport block.

FIG. 23 shows an example method for beam management.

FIG. 24 shows an example method for beam management.

FIG. 25 shows an example method for beam management.

FIG. 26 shows an example method for transmission of a transport block.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION

The accompanying drawings and descriptions provide examples. It is to be understood that the examples shown in the drawings and/or described are non-exclusive, and that features shown and described may be practiced in other examples. Examples are provided for operation of wireless communication systems, which may be used in the technical field of multicarrier communication systems. More particularly, the technology disclosed herein may relate to transmission and/or reception configuration and signaling for wireless communication.

FIG. 1A shows an example communication network 100. The communication network 100 may comprise a mobile communication network). The communication network 100 may comprise, for example, a public land mobile network (PLMN) operated/managed/run by a network operator. The communication network 100 may comprise one or more of a core network (CN) 102, a radio access network (RAN) 104, and/or a wireless device 106. The communication network 100 may comprise, and/or a device within the communication network 100 may communicate with (e.g., via CN 102), one or more data networks (DN(s)) 108. The wireless device 106 may communicate with one or more DNs 108, such as public DNs (e.g., the Internet), private DNs, and/or intra-operator DNs. The wireless device 106 may communicate with the one or more DNs 108 via the RAN 104 and/or via the CN 102. The CN 102 may provide/configure the wireless device 106 with one or more interfaces to the one or more DNs 108. As part of the interface functionality, the CN 102 may set up end-to-end connections between the wireless device 106 and the one or more DNs 108, authenticate the wireless device 106, provide/configure charging functionality, etc.

The wireless device 106 may communicate with the RAN 104 via radio communications over an air interface. The RAN 104 may communicate with the CN 102 via various communications (e.g., wired communications and/or wireless communications). The wireless device 106 may establish a connection with the CN 102 via the RAN 104. The RAN 104 may provide/configure scheduling, radio resource management, and/or retransmission protocols, for example, as part of the radio communications. The communication direction from the RAN 104 to the wireless device 106 over/via the air interface may be referred to as the downlink and/or downlink communication direction. The communication direction from the wireless device 106 to the RAN 104 over/via the air interface may be referred to as the uplink and/or uplink communication direction. Downlink transmissions may be separated and/or distinguished from uplink transmissions, for example, based on at least one of: frequency division duplexing (FDD), time-division duplexing (TDD), any other duplexing schemes, and/or one or more combinations thereof.

As used throughout, the term “wireless device” may comprise one or more of: a mobile device, a fixed (e.g., non-mobile) device for which wireless communication is configured or usable, a computing device, a node, a device capable of wirelessly communicating, or any other device capable of sending and/or receiving signals. As non-limiting examples, a wireless device may comprise, for example: a telephone, a cellular phone, a Wi-Fi phone, a smartphone, a tablet, a computer, a laptop, a sensor, a meter, a wearable device, an Internet of Things (IoT) device, a hotspot, a cellular repeater, a vehicle road side unit (RSU), a relay node, an automobile, a wireless user device (e.g., user equipment (UE), a user terminal (UT), etc.), an access terminal (AT), a mobile station, a handset, a wireless transmit and receive unit (WTRU), a wireless communication device, and/or any combination thereof.

The RAN 104 may comprise one or more base stations (not shown). As used throughout, the term “base station” may comprise one or more of: a base station, a node, a Node B (NB), an evolved NodeB (eNB), a gNB, an ng-eNB, a relay node (e.g., an integrated access and backhaul (IAB) node), a donor node (e.g., a donor eNB, a donor gNB, etc.), an access point (e.g., a Wi-Fi access point), a transmission and reception point (TRP), a computing device, a device capable of wirelessly communicating, or any other device capable of sending and/or receiving signals. A base station may comprise one or more of each element listed above. For example, a base station may comprise one or more TRPs. As other non-limiting examples, a base station may comprise for example, one or more of: a Node B (e.g., associated with Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) and/or third-generation (3G) standards), an Evolved Node B (eNB) (e.g., associated with Evolved-Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and/or fourth-generation (4G) standards), a remote radio head (RRH), a baseband processing unit coupled to one or more remote radio heads (RRHs), a repeater node or relay node used to extend the coverage area of a donor node, a Next Generation Evolved Node B (ng-eNB), a Generation Node B (gNB) (e.g., associated with NR and/or fifth-generation (5G) standards), an access point (AP) (e.g., associated with, for example, Wi-Fi or any other suitable wireless communication standard), any other generation base station, and/or any combination thereof. A base station may comprise one or more devices, such as at least one base station central device (e.g., a gNB Central Unit (gNB-CU)) and at least one base station distributed device (e.g., a gNB Distributed Unit (gNB-DU)).

A base station (e.g., in the RAN 104) may comprise one or more sets of antennas for communicating with the wireless device 106 wirelessly (e.g., via an over the air interface). One or more base stations may comprise sets (e.g., three sets or any other quantity of sets) of antennas to respectively control multiple cells or sectors (e.g., three cells, three sectors, any other quantity of cells, or any other quantity of sectors). The size of a cell may be determined by a range at which a receiver (e.g., a base station receiver) may successfully receive transmissions from a transmitter (e.g., a wireless device transmitter) operating in the cell. One or more cells of base stations (e.g., by alone or in combination with other cells) may provide/configure a radio coverage to the wireless device 106 over a wide geographic area to support wireless device mobility. A base station comprising three sectors (e.g., or n-sector, where n refers to any quantity n) may be referred to as a three-sector site (e.g., or an n-sector site) or a three-sector base station (e.g., an n-sector base station).

One or more base stations (e.g., in the RAN 104) may be implemented as a sectored site with more or less than three sectors. One or more base stations of the RAN 104 may be implemented as an access point, as a baseband processing device/unit coupled to several RRHs, and/or as a repeater or relay node used to extend the coverage area of a node (e.g., a donor node). A baseband processing device/unit coupled to RRHs may be part of a centralized or cloud RAN architecture, for example, where the baseband processing device/unit may be centralized in a pool of baseband processing devices/units or virtualized. A repeater node may amplify and send (e.g., transmit, retransmit, rebroadcast, etc.) a radio signal received from a donor node. A relay node may perform the substantially the same/similar functions as a repeater node. The relay node may decode the radio signal received from the donor node, for example, to remove noise before amplifying and sending the radio signal.

The RAN 104 may be deployed as a homogenous network of base stations (e.g., macrocell base stations) that have similar antenna patterns and/or similar high-level transmit powers. The RAN 104 may be deployed as a heterogeneous network of base stations (e.g., different base stations that have different antenna patterns). In heterogeneous networks, small cell base stations may be used to provide/configure small coverage areas, for example, coverage areas that overlap with comparatively larger coverage areas provided/configured by other base stations (e.g., macrocell base stations). The small coverage areas may be provided/configured in areas with high data traffic (or so-called “hotspots”) or in areas with a weak macrocell coverage. Examples of small cell base stations may comprise, in order of decreasing coverage area, microcell base stations, picocell base stations, and femtocell base stations or home base stations.

Examples described herein may be used in a variety of types of communications. For example, communications may be in accordance with the Third-Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) (e.g., one or more network elements similar to those of the communication network 100), communications in accordance with Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE), communications in accordance with International Telecommunication Union (ITU), communications in accordance with International Organization for Standardization (ISO), etc. The 3GPP has produced specifications for multiple generations of mobile networks: a 3G network known as UMTS, a 4G network known as Long-Term Evolution (LTE) and LTE Advanced (LTE-A), and a 5G network known as 5G System (5GS) and NR system. 3GPP may produce specifications for additional generations of communication networks (e.g., 6G and/or any other generation of communication network). Examples may be described with reference to one or more elements (e.g., the RAN) of a 3GPP 5G network, referred to as a next-generation RAN (NG-RAN), or any other communication network, such as a 3GPP network and/or a non-3GPP network. Examples described herein may be applicable to other communication networks, such as 3G and/or 4G networks, and communication networks that may not yet be finalized/specified (e.g., a 3GPP 6G network), satellite communication networks, and/or any other communication network. NG-RAN implements and updates 5G radio access technology referred to as NR and may be provisioned to implement 4G radio access technology and/or other radio access technologies, such as other 3GPP and/or non-3GPP radio access technologies.

FIG. 1B shows an example communication network 150. The communication network may comprise a mobile communication network. The communication network 150 may comprise, for example, a PLMN operated/managed/run by a network operator. The communication network 150 may comprise one or more of: a CN 152 (e.g., a 5G core network (5G-CN)), a RAN 154 (e.g., an NG-RAN), and/or wireless devices 156A and 156B (collectively wireless device(s) 156). The communication network 150 may comprise, and/or a device within the communication network 150 may communicate with (e.g., via CN 152), one or more data networks (DN(s)) 170. These components may be implemented and operate in substantially the same or similar manner as corresponding components described with respect to FIG. 1A.

The CN 152 (e.g., 5G-CN) may provide/configure the wireless device(s) 156 with one or more interfaces to one or more DNs 170, such as public DNs (e.g., the Internet), private DNs, and/or intra-operator DNs. As part of the interface functionality, the CN 152 (e.g., 5G-CN) may set up end-to-end connections between the wireless device(s) 156 and the one or more DNs, authenticate the wireless device(s) 156, and/or provide/configure charging functionality. The CN 152 (e.g., the 5G-CN) may be a service-based architecture, which may differ from other CNs (e.g., such as a 3GPP 4G CN). The architecture of nodes of the CN 152 (e.g., 5G-CN) may be defined as network functions that offer services via interfaces to other network functions. The network functions of the CN 152 (e.g., 5G CN) may be implemented in several ways, for example, as network elements on dedicated or shared hardware, as software instances running on dedicated or shared hardware, and/or as virtualized functions instantiated on a platform (e.g., a cloud-based platform).

The CN 152 (e.g., 5G-CN) may comprise an Access and Mobility Management Function (AMF) device 158A and/or a User Plane Function (UPF) device 158B, which may be separate components or one component AMF/UPF device 158. The UPF device 158B may serve as a gateway between a RAN 154 (e.g., NG-RAN) and the one or more DNs 170. The UPF device 158B may perform functions, such as: packet routing and forwarding, packet inspection and user plane policy rule enforcement, traffic usage reporting, uplink classification to support routing of traffic flows to the one or more DNs 170, quality of service (QoS) handling for the user plane (e.g., packet filtering, gating, uplink/downlink rate enforcement, and uplink traffic verification), downlink packet buffering, and/or downlink data notification triggering. The UPF device 158B may serve as an anchor point for intra-/inter-Radio Access Technology (RAT) mobility, an external protocol (or packet) data unit (PDU) session point of interconnect to the one or more DNs, and/or a branching point to support a multi-homed PDU session. The wireless device(s) 156 may be configured to receive services via a PDU session, which may be a logical connection between a wireless device and a DN.

The AMF device 158A may perform functions, such as: Non-Access Stratum (NAS) signaling termination, NAS signaling security, Access Stratum (AS) security control, inter-CN node signaling for mobility between access networks (e.g., 3GPP access networks and/or non-3GPP networks), idle mode wireless device reachability (e.g., idle mode UE reachability for control and execution of paging retransmission), registration area management, intra-system and inter-system mobility support, access authentication, access authorization including checking of roaming rights, mobility management control (e.g., subscription and policies), network slicing support, and/or session management function (SMF) selection. NAS may refer to the functionality operating between a CN and a wireless device, and AS may refer to the functionality operating between a wireless device and a RAN.

The CN 152 (e.g., 5G-CN) may comprise one or more additional network functions that may not be shown in FIG. 1B. The CN 152 (e.g., 5G-CN) may comprise one or more devices implementing at least one of: a Session Management Function (SMF), an NR Repository Function (NRF), a Policy Control Function (PCF), a Network Exposure Function (NEF), a Unified Data Management (UDM), an Application Function (AF), an Authentication Server Function (AUSF), and/or any other function.

The RAN 154 (e.g., NG-RAN) may communicate with the wireless device(s) 156 via radio communications (e.g., an over the air interface). The wireless device(s) 156 may communicate with the CN 152 via the RAN 154. The RAN 154 (e.g., NG-RAN) may comprise one or more first-type base stations (e.g., gNBs comprising a gNB 160A and a gNB 160B (collectively gNBs 160)) and/or one or more second-type base stations (e.g., ng eNBs comprising an ng-eNB 162A and an ng-eNB 162B (collectively ng eNBs 162)). The RAN 154 may comprise one or more of any quantity of types of base station. The gNBs 160 and ng eNBs 162 may be referred to as base stations. The base stations (e.g., the gNBs 160 and ng eNBs 162) may comprise one or more sets of antennas for communicating with the wireless device(s) 156 wirelessly (e.g., an over an air interface). One or more base stations (e.g., the gNBs 160 and/or the ng eNBs 162) may comprise multiple sets of antennas to respectively control multiple cells (or sectors). The cells of the base stations (e.g., the gNBs 160 and the ng-eNBs 162) may provide a radio coverage to the wireless device(s) 156 over a wide geographic area to support wireless device mobility.

The base stations (e.g., the gNBs 160 and/or the ng-eNBs 162) may be connected to the CN 152 (e.g., 5G CN) via a first interface (e.g., an NG interface) and to other base stations via a second interface (e.g., an Xn interface). The NG and Xn interfaces may be established using direct physical connections and/or indirect connections over an underlying transport network, such as an internet protocol (IP) transport network. The base stations (e.g., the gNBs 160 and/or the ng-eNBs 162) may communicate with the wireless device(s) 156 via a third interface (e.g., a Uu interface). A base station (e.g., the gNB 160A) may communicate with the wireless device 156A via a Uu interface. The NG, Xn, and Uu interfaces may be associated with a protocol stack. The protocol stacks associated with the interfaces may be used by the network elements shown in FIG. 1B to exchange data and signaling messages. The protocol stacks may comprise two planes: a user plane and a control plane. Any other quantity of planes may be used (e.g., in a protocol stack). The user plane may handle data of interest to a user. The control plane may handle signaling messages of interest to the network elements.

One or more base stations (e.g., the gNBs 160 and/or the ng-eNBs 162) may communicate with one or more AMF/UPF devices, such as the AMF/UPF 158, via one or more interfaces (e.g., NG interfaces). A base station (e.g., the gNB 160A) may be in communication with, and/or connected to, the UPF 158B of the AMF/UPF 158 via an NG-User plane (NG-U) interface. The NG-U interface may provide/perform delivery (e.g., non-guaranteed delivery) of user plane PDUs between a base station (e.g., the gNB 160A) and a UPF device (e.g., the UPF 158B). The base station (e.g., the gNB 160A) may be in communication with, and/or connected to, an AMF device (e.g., the AMF 158A) via an NG-Control plane (NG-C) interface. The NG-C interface may provide/perform, for example, NG interface management, wireless device context management (e.g., UE context management), wireless device mobility management (e.g., UE mobility management), transport of NAS messages, paging, PDU session management, configuration transfer, and/or warning message transmission.

A wireless device may access the base station, via an interface (e.g., Uu interface), for the user plane configuration and the control plane configuration. The base stations (e.g., gNBs 160) may provide user plane and control plane protocol terminations towards the wireless device(s) 156 via the Uu interface. A base station (e.g., the gNB 160A) may provide user plane and control plane protocol terminations toward the wireless device 156A over a Uu interface associated with a first protocol stack. A base station (e.g., the ng-eNBs 162) may provide Evolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access (E UTRA) user plane and control plane protocol terminations towards the wireless device(s) 156 via a Uu interface (e.g., where E UTRA may refer to the 3GPP 4G radio-access technology). A base station (e.g., the ng-eNB 162B) may provide E UTRA user plane and control plane protocol terminations towards the wireless device 156B via a Uu interface associated with a second protocol stack. The user plane and control plane protocol terminations may comprise, for example, NR user plane and control plane protocol terminations, 4G user plane and control plane protocol terminations, etc.

The CN 152 (e.g., 5G-CN) may be configured to handle one or more radio accesses (e.g., NR, 4G, and/or any other radio accesses). It may also be possible for an NR network/device (or any first network/device) to connect to a 4G core network/device (or any second network/device) in a non-standalone mode (e.g., non-standalone operation). In a non-standalone mode/operation, a 4G core network may be used to provide (or at least support) control-plane functionality (e.g., initial access, mobility, and/or paging). Although only one AMF/UPF 158 is shown in FIG. 1B, one or more base stations (e.g., one or more gNBs and/or one or more ng-eNBs) may be connected to multiple AMF/UPF nodes, for example, to provide redundancy and/or to load share across the multiple AMF/UPF nodes.

An interface (e.g., Uu, Xn, and/or NG interfaces) between network elements (e.g., the network elements shown in FIG. 1B) may be associated with a protocol stack that the network elements may use to exchange data and signaling messages. A protocol stack may comprise two planes: a user plane and a control plane. Any other quantity of planes may be used (e.g., in a protocol stack). The user plane may handle data associated with a user (e.g., data of interest to a user). The control plane may handle data associated with one or more network elements (e.g., signaling messages of interest to the network elements).

The communication network 100 in FIG. 1A and/or the communication network 150 in FIG. 1B may comprise any quantity/number and/or type of devices, such as, for example, computing devices, wireless devices, mobile devices, handsets, tablets, laptops, internet of things (IoT) devices, hotspots, cellular repeaters, computing devices, and/or, more generally, user equipment (e.g., UE). Although one or more of the above types of devices may be referenced herein (e.g., UE, wireless device, computing device, etc.), it should be understood that any device herein may comprise any one or more of the above types of devices or similar devices. The communication network, and any other network referenced herein, may comprise an LTE network, a 5G network, a satellite network, and/or any other network for wireless communications (e.g., any 3GPP network and/or any non-3GPP network). Apparatuses, systems, and/or methods described herein may generally be described as implemented on one or more devices (e.g., wireless device, base station, eNB, gNB, computing device, etc.), in one or more networks, but it will be understood that one or more features and steps may be implemented on any device and/or in any network.

FIG. 2A shows an example user plane configuration. The user plane configuration may comprise, for example, an NR user plane protocol stack. FIG. 2B shows an example control plane configuration. The control plane configuration may comprise, for example, an NR control plane protocol stack. One or more of the user plane configuration and/or the control plane configuration may use a Uu interface that may be between a wireless device 210 and a base station 220. The protocol stacks shown in FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B may be substantially the same or similar to those used for the Uu interface between, for example, the wireless device 156A and the base station 160A shown in FIG. 1B.

A user plane configuration (e.g., an NR user plane protocol stack) may comprise multiple layers (e.g., five layers or any other quantity of layers) implemented in the wireless device 210 and the base station 220 (e.g., as shown in FIG. 2A). At the bottom of the protocol stack, physical layers (PHYs) 211 and 221 may provide transport services to the higher layers of the protocol stack and may correspond to layer 1 of the Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) model. The protocol layers above PHY 211 may comprise a medium access control layer (MAC) 212, a radio link control layer (RLC) 213, a packet data convergence protocol layer (PDCP) 214, and/or a service data application protocol layer (SDAP) 215. The protocol layers above PHY 221 may comprise a medium access control layer (MAC) 222, a radio link control layer (RLC) 223, a packet data convergence protocol layer (PDCP) 224, and/or a service data application protocol layer (SDAP) 225. One or more of the four protocol layers above PHY 211 may correspond to layer 2, or the data link layer, of the OSI model. One or more of the four protocol layers above PHY 221 may correspond to layer 2, or the data link layer, of the OSI model.

FIG. 3 shows an example of protocol layers. The protocol layers may comprise, for example, protocol layers of the NR user plane protocol stack. One or more services may be provided between protocol layers. SDAPs (e.g., SDAPS 215 and 225 shown in FIG. 2A and FIG. 3) may perform Quality of Service (QoS) flow handling. A wireless device (e.g., the wireless devices 106, 156A, 156B, and 210) may receive services through/via a PDU session, which may be a logical connection between the wireless device and a DN. The PDU session may have one or more QoS flows 310. A UPF (e.g., the UPF 158B) of a CN may map IP packets to the one or more QoS flows of the PDU session, for example, based on one or more QoS requirements (e.g., in terms of delay, data rate, error rate, and/or any other quality/service requirement). The SDAPs 215 and 225 may perform mapping/de-mapping between the one or more QoS flows 310 and one or more radio bearers 320 (e.g., data radio bearers). The mapping/de-mapping between the one or more QoS flows 310 and the radio bearers 320 may be determined by the SDAP 225 of the base station 220. The SDAP 215 of the wireless device 210 may be informed of the mapping between the QoS flows 310 and the radio bearers 320 via reflective mapping and/or control signaling received from the base station 220. For reflective mapping, the SDAP 225 of the base station 220 may mark the downlink packets with a QoS flow indicator (QFI), which may be monitored/detected/identified/indicated/observed by the SDAP 215 of the wireless device 210 to determine the mapping/de-mapping between the one or more QoS flows 310 and the radio bearers 320.

PDCPs (e.g., the PDCPs 214 and 224 shown in FIG. 2A and FIG. 3) may perform header compression/decompression, for example, to reduce the amount of data that may need to be transmitted over the air interface, ciphering/deciphering to prevent unauthorized decoding of data transmitted over the air interface, and/or integrity protection (e.g., to ensure control messages originate from intended sources). The PDCPs 214 and 224 may perform retransmissions of undelivered packets, in-sequence delivery and reordering of packets, and/or removal of packets received in duplicate due to, for example, a handover (e.g., an intra-gNB handover). The PDCPs 214 and 224 may perform packet duplication, for example, to improve the likelihood of the packet being received. A receiver may receive the packet in duplicate and may remove any duplicate packets. Packet duplication may be useful for certain services, such as services that require high reliability.

The PDCP layers (e.g., PDCPs 214 and 224) may perform mapping/de-mapping between a split radio bearer and RLC channels (e.g., RLC channels 330) (e.g., in a dual connectivity scenario/configuration). Dual connectivity may refer to a technique that allows a wireless device to communicate with multiple cells (e.g., two cells) or, more generally, multiple cell groups comprising: a master cell group (MCG) and a secondary cell group (SCG). A split bearer may be configured and/or used, for example, if a single radio bearer (e.g., such as one of the radio bearers provided/configured by the PDCPs 214 and 224 as a service to the SDAPs 215 and 225) is handled by cell groups in dual connectivity. The PDCPs 214 and 224 may map/de-map between the split radio bearer and RLC channels 330 belonging to the cell groups.

RLC layers (e.g., RLCs 213 and 223) may perform segmentation, retransmission via Automatic Repeat Request (ARQ), and/or removal of duplicate data units received from MAC layers (e.g., MACs 212 and 222, respectively). The RLC layers (e.g., RLCs 213 and 223) may support multiple transmission modes (e.g., three transmission modes: transparent mode (TM); unacknowledged mode (UM); and acknowledged mode (AM)). The RLC layers may perform one or more of the noted functions, for example, based on the transmission mode an RLC layer is operating. The RLC configuration may be per logical channel The RLC configuration may not depend on numerologies and/or Transmission Time Interval (TTI) durations (or other durations). The RLC layers (e.g., RLCs 213 and 223) may provide/configure RLC channels as a service to the PDCP layers (e.g., PDCPs 214 and 224, respectively), such as shown in FIG. 3.

The MAC layers (e.g., MACs 212 and 222) may perform multiplexing/demultiplexing of logical channels and/or mapping between logical channels and transport channels. The multiplexing/demultiplexing may comprise multiplexing/demultiplexing of data units/data portions, belonging to the one or more logical channels, into/from Transport Blocks (TBs) delivered to/from the PHY layers (e.g., PHYs 211 and 221, respectively). The MAC layer of a base station (e.g., MAC 222) may be configured to perform scheduling, scheduling information reporting, and/or priority handling between wireless devices via dynamic scheduling. Scheduling may be performed by a base station (e.g., the base station 220 at the MAC 222) for downlink/or and uplink. The MAC layers (e.g., MACs 212 and 222) may be configured to perform error correction(s) via Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ) (e.g., one HARQ entity per carrier in case of Carrier Aggregation (CA)), priority handling between logical channels of the wireless device 210 via logical channel prioritization and/or padding. The MAC layers (e.g., MACs 212 and 222) may support one or more numerologies and/or transmission timings. Mapping restrictions in a logical channel prioritization may control which numerology and/or transmission timing a logical channel may use. The MAC layers (e.g., the MACs 212 and 222) may provide/configure logical channels 340 as a service to the RLC layers (e.g., the RLCs 213 and 223).

The PHY layers (e.g., PHYs 211 and 221) may perform mapping of transport channels to physical channels and/or digital and analog signal processing functions, for example, for sending and/or receiving information (e.g., via an over the air interface). The digital and/or analog signal processing functions may comprise, for example, coding/decoding and/or modulation/demodulation. The PHY layers (e.g., PHYs 211 and 221) may perform multi-antenna mapping. The PHY layers (e.g., the PHYs 211 and 221) may provide/configure one or more transport channels (e.g., transport channels 350) as a service to the MAC layers (e.g., the MACs 212 and 222, respectively).

FIG. 4A shows an example downlink data flow for a user plane configuration. The user plane configuration may comprise, for example, the NR user plane protocol stack shown in FIG. 2A. One or more TBs may be generated, for example, based on a data flow via a user plane protocol stack. As shown in FIG. 4A, a downlink data flow of three IP packets (n, n+1, and m) via the NR user plane protocol stack may generate two TBs (e.g., at the base station 220). An uplink data flow via the NR user plane protocol stack may be similar to the downlink data flow shown in FIG. 4A. The three IP packets (n, n+1, and m) may be determined from the two TBs, for example, based on the uplink data flow via an NR user plane protocol stack. A first quantity of packets (e.g., three or any other quantity) may be determined from a second quantity of TBs (e.g., two or another quantity).

The downlink data flow may begin, for example, if the SDAP 225 receives the three IP packets (or other quantity of IP packets) from one or more QoS flows and maps the three packets (or other quantity of packets) to radio bearers (e.g., radio bearers 402 and 404). The SDAP 225 may map the IP packets n and n+1 to a first radio bearer 402 and map the IP packet m to a second radio bearer 404. An SDAP header (labeled with “H” preceding each SDAP SDU shown in FIG. 4A) may be added to an IP packet to generate an SDAP PDU, which may be referred to as a PDCP SDU. The data unit transferred from/to a higher protocol layer may be referred to as a service data unit (SDU) of the lower protocol layer, and the data unit transferred to/from a lower protocol layer may be referred to as a protocol data unit (PDU) of the higher protocol layer. As shown in FIG. 4A, the data unit from the SDAP 225 may be an SDU of lower protocol layer PDCP 224 (e.g., PDCP SDU) and may be a PDU of the SDAP 225 (e.g., SDAP PDU).

Each protocol layer (e.g., protocol layers shown in FIG. 4A) or at least some protocol layers may: perform its own function(s) (e.g., one or more functions of each protocol layer described with respect to FIG. 3), add a corresponding header, and/or forward a respective output to the next lower layer (e.g., its respective lower layer). The PDCP 224 may perform an IP-header compression and/or ciphering. The PDCP 224 may forward its output (e.g., a PDCP PDU, which is an RLC SDU) to the RLC 223. The RLC 223 may optionally perform segmentation (e.g., as shown for IP packet m in FIG. 4A). The RLC 223 may forward its outputs (e.g., two RLC PDUs, which are two MAC SDUs, generated by adding respective subheaders to two SDU segments (SDU Segs)) to the MAC 222. The MAC 222 may multiplex a number of RLC PDUs (MAC SDUs). The MAC 222 may attach a MAC subheader to an RLC PDU (MAC SDU) to form a TB. The MAC subheaders may be distributed across the MAC PDU (e.g., in an NR configuration as shown in FIG. 4A). The MAC subheaders may be entirely located at the beginning of a MAC PDU (e.g., in an LTE configuration). The NR MAC PDU structure may reduce a processing time and/or associated latency, for example, if the MAC PDU subheaders are computed before assembling the full MAC PDU.

FIG. 4B shows an example format of a MAC subheader in a MAC PDU. A MAC PDU may comprise a MAC subheader (H) and a MAC SDU. Each of one or more MAC subheaders may comprise an SDU length field for indicating the length (e.g., in bytes) of the MAC SDU to which the MAC subheader corresponds; a logical channel identifier (LCID) field for identifying/indicating the logical channel from which the MAC SDU originated to aid in the demultiplexing process; a flag (F) for indicating the size of the SDU length field; and a reserved bit (R) field for future use.

One or more MAC control elements (CEs) may be added to, or inserted into, the MAC PDU by a MAC layer, such as MAC 223 or MAC 222. As shown in FIG. 4B, two MAC CEs may be inserted/added before two MAC PDUs. The MAC CEs may be inserted/added at the beginning of a MAC PDU for downlink transmissions (as shown in FIG. 4B). One or more MAC CEs may be inserted/added at the end of a MAC PDU for uplink transmissions. MAC CEs may be used for in band control signaling. Example MAC CEs may comprise scheduling-related MAC CEs, such as buffer status reports and power headroom reports; activation/deactivation MAC CEs (e.g., MAC CEs for activation/deactivation of PDCP duplication detection, channel state information (CSI) reporting, sounding reference signal (SRS) transmission, and prior configured components); discontinuous reception (DRX)-related MAC CEs; timing advance MAC CEs; and random access-related MAC CEs. A MAC CE may be preceded by a MAC subheader with a similar format as described for the MAC subheader for MAC SDUs and may be identified with a reserved value in the LCID field that indicates the type of control information included in the corresponding MAC CE.

FIG. 5A shows an example mapping for downlink channels. The mapping for uplink channels may comprise mapping between channels (e.g., logical channels, transport channels, and physical channels) for downlink. FIG. 5B shows an example mapping for uplink channels. The mapping for uplink channels may comprise mapping between channels (e.g., logical channels, transport channels, and physical channels) for uplink. Information may be passed through/via channels between the RLC, the MAC, and the PHY layers of a protocol stack (e.g., the NR protocol stack). A logical channel may be used between the RLC and the MAC layers. The logical channel may be classified/indicated as a control channel that may carry control and/or configuration information (e.g., in the NR control plane), or as a traffic channel that may carry data (e.g., in the NR user plane). A logical channel may be classified/indicated as a dedicated logical channel that may be dedicated to a specific wireless device, and/or as a common logical channel that may be used by more than one wireless device (e.g., a group of wireless device).

A logical channel may be defined by the type of information it carries. The set of logical channels (e.g., in an NR configuration) may comprise one or more channels described below. A paging control channel (PCCH) may comprise/carry one or more paging messages used to page a wireless device whose location is not known to the network on a cell level. A broadcast control channel (BCCH) may comprise/carry system information messages in the form of a master information block (MIB) and several system information blocks (SIB s). The system information messages may be used by wireless devices to obtain information about how a cell is configured and how to operate within the cell. A common control channel (CCCH) may comprise/carry control messages together with random access. A dedicated control channel (DCCH) may comprise/carry control messages to/from a specific wireless device to configure the wireless device with configuration information. A dedicated traffic channel (DTCH) may comprise/carry user data to/from a specific wireless device.

Transport channels may be used between the MAC and PHY layers. Transport channels may be defined by how the information they carry is sent/transmitted (e.g., via an over the air interface). The set of transport channels (e.g., that may be defined by an NR configuration or any other configuration) may comprise one or more of the following channels. A paging channel (PCH) may comprise/carry paging messages that originated from the PCCH. A broadcast channel (BCH) may comprise/carry the MIB from the BCCH. A downlink shared channel (DL-SCH) may comprise/carry downlink data and signaling messages, including the SIBs from the BCCH. An uplink shared channel (UL-SCH) may comprise/carry uplink data and signaling messages. A random access channel (RACH) may provide a wireless device with an access to the network without any prior scheduling.

The PHY layer may use physical channels to pass/transfer information between processing levels of the PHY layer. A physical channel may have an associated set of time-frequency resources for carrying the information of one or more transport channels. The PHY layer may generate control information to support the low-level operation of the PHY layer. The PHY layer may provide/transfer the control information to the lower levels of the PHY layer via physical control channels (e.g., referred to as L1/L2 control channels). The set of physical channels and physical control channels (e.g., that may be defined by an NR configuration or any other configuration) may comprise one or more of the following channels. A physical broadcast channel (PBCH) may comprise/carry the MIB from the BCH. A physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) may comprise/carry downlink data and signaling messages from the DL-SCH, as well as paging messages from the PCH. A physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) may comprise/carry downlink control information (DCI), which may comprise downlink scheduling commands, uplink scheduling grants, and uplink power control commands A physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) may comprise/carry uplink data and signaling messages from the UL-SCH and in some instances uplink control information (UCI) as described below. A physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) may comprise/carry UCI, which may comprise HARQ acknowledgments, channel quality indicators (CQI), pre-coding matrix indicators (PMI), rank indicators (RI), and scheduling requests (SR). A physical random access channel (PRACH) may be used for random access.

The physical layer may generate physical signals to support the low-level operation of the physical layer, which may be similar to the physical control channels. As shown in FIG. 5A and FIG. 5B, the physical layer signals (e.g., that may be defined by an NR configuration or any other configuration) may comprise primary synchronization signals (PSS), secondary synchronization signals (SSS), channel state information reference signals (CSI-RS), demodulation reference signals (DM-RS), sounding reference signals (SRS), phase-tracking reference signals (PT RS), and/or any other signals.

One or more of the channels (e.g., logical channels, transport channels, physical channels, etc.) may be used to carry out functions associated with the control plan protocol stack (e.g., NR control plane protocol stack). FIG. 2B shows an example control plane configuration (e.g., an NR control plane protocol stack). As shown in FIG. 2B, the control plane configuration (e.g., the NR control plane protocol stack) may use substantially the same/similar one or more protocol layers (e.g., PHY 211 and 221, MAC 212 and 222, RLC 213 and 223, and PDCP 214 and 224) as the example user plane configuration (e.g., the NR user plane protocol stack). Similar four protocol layers may comprise the PHYs 211 and 221, the MACs 212 and 222, the RLCs 213 and 223, and the PDCPs 214 and 224. The control plane configuration (e.g., the NR control plane stack) may have radio resource controls (RRCs) 216 and 226 and NAS protocols 217 and 237 at the top of the control plane configuration (e.g., the NR control plane protocol stack), for example, instead of having the SDAPs 215 and 225. The control plane configuration may comprise an AMF 230 comprising the NAS protocol 237.

The NAS protocols 217 and 237 may provide control plane functionality between the wireless device 210 and the AMF 230 (e.g., the AMF 158A or any other AMF) and/or, more generally, between the wireless device 210 and a CN (e.g., the CN 152 or any other CN). The NAS protocols 217 and 237 may provide control plane functionality between the wireless device 210 and the AMF 230 via signaling messages, referred to as NAS messages. There may be no direct path between the wireless device 210 and the AMF 230 via which the NAS messages may be transported. The NAS messages may be transported using the AS of the Uu and NG interfaces. The NAS protocols 217 and 237 may provide control plane functionality, such as authentication, security, a connection setup, mobility management, session management, and/or any other functionality.

The RRCs 216 and 226 may provide/configure control plane functionality between the wireless device 210 and the base station 220 and/or, more generally, between the wireless device 210 and the RAN (e.g., the base station 220). The RRC layers 216 and 226 may provide/configure control plane functionality between the wireless device 210 and the base station 220 via signaling messages, which may be referred to as RRC messages. The RRC messages may be sent/transmitted between the wireless device 210 and the RAN (e.g., the base station 220) using signaling radio bearers and the same/similar PDCP, RLC, MAC, and PHY protocol layers. The MAC layer may multiplex control-plane and user-plane data into the same TB. The RRC layers 216 and 226 may provide/configure control plane functionality, such as one or more of the following functionalities: broadcast of system information related to AS and NAS; paging initiated by the CN or the RAN; establishment, maintenance and release of an RRC connection between the wireless device 210 and the RAN (e.g., the base station 220); security functions including key management; establishment, configuration, maintenance and release of signaling radio bearers and data radio bearers; mobility functions; QoS management functions; wireless device measurement reporting (e.g., the wireless device measurement reporting) and control of the reporting; detection of and recovery from radio link failure (RLF); and/or NAS message transfer. As part of establishing an RRC connection, RRC layers 216 and 226 may establish an RRC context, which may involve configuring parameters for communication between the wireless device 210 and the RAN (e.g., the base station 220).

FIG. 6 shows example RRC states and RRC state transitions. An RRC state of a wireless device may be changed to another RRC state (e.g., RRC state transitions of a wireless device). The wireless device may be substantially the same or similar to the wireless device 106, 210, or any other wireless device. A wireless device may be in at least one of a plurality of states, such as three RRC states comprising RRC connected 602 (e.g., RRC_CONNECTED), RRC idle 606 (e.g., RRC_IDLE), and RRC inactive 604 (e.g., RRC_INACTIVE). The RRC inactive 604 may be RRC connected but inactive.

An RRC connection may be established for the wireless device. For example, this may be during an RRC connected state. During the RRC connected state (e.g., during the RRC connected 602), the wireless device may have an established RRC context and may have at least one RRC connection with a base station. The base station may be similar to one of the one or more base stations (e.g., one or more base stations of the RAN 104 shown in FIG. 1A, one of the gNBs 160 or ng-eNBs 162 shown in FIG. 1B, the base station 220 shown in FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B, or any other base stations). The base station with which the wireless device is connected (e.g., has established an RRC connection) may have the RRC context for the wireless device. The RRC context, which may be referred to as a wireless device context (e.g., the UE context), may comprise parameters for communication between the wireless device and the base station. These parameters may comprise, for example, one or more of: AS contexts; radio link configuration parameters; bearer configuration information (e.g., relating to a data radio bearer, a signaling radio bearer, a logical channel, a QoS flow, and/or a PDU session); security information; and/or layer configuration information (e.g., PHY, MAC, RLC, PDCP, and/or SDAP layer configuration information). During the RRC connected state (e.g., the RRC connected 602), mobility of the wireless device may be managed/controlled by an RAN (e.g., the RAN 104 or the NG RAN 154). The wireless device may measure received signal levels (e.g., reference signal levels, reference signal received power, reference signal received quality, received signal strength indicator, etc.) based on one or more signals sent from a serving cell and neighboring cells. The wireless device may report these measurements to a serving base station (e.g., the base station currently serving the wireless device). The serving base station of the wireless device may request a handover to a cell of one of the neighboring base stations, for example, based on the reported measurements. The RRC state may transition from the RRC connected state (e.g., RRC connected 602) to an RRC idle state (e.g., the RRC idle 606) via a connection release procedure 608. The RRC state may transition from the RRC connected state (e.g., RRC connected 602) to the RRC inactive state (e.g., RRC inactive 604) via a connection inactivation procedure 610.

An RRC context may not be established for the wireless device. For example, this may be during the RRC idle state. During the RRC idle state (e.g., the RRC idle 606), an RRC context may not be established for the wireless device. During the RRC idle state (e.g., the RRC idle 606), the wireless device may not have an RRC connection with the base station. During the RRC idle state (e.g., the RRC idle 606), the wireless device may be in a sleep state for the majority of the time (e.g., to conserve battery power). The wireless device may wake up periodically (e.g., each discontinuous reception (DRX) cycle) to monitor for paging messages (e.g., paging messages set from the RAN). Mobility of the wireless device may be managed by the wireless device via a procedure of a cell reselection. The RRC state may transition from the RRC idle state (e.g., the RRC idle 606) to the RRC connected state (e.g., the RRC connected 602) via a connection establishment procedure 612, which may involve a random access procedure.

A previously established RRC context may be maintained for the wireless device. For example, this may be during the RRC inactive state. During the RRC inactive state (e.g., the RRC inactive 604), the RRC context previously established may be maintained in the wireless device and the base station. The maintenance of the RRC context may enable/allow a fast transition to the RRC connected state (e.g., the RRC connected 602) with reduced signaling overhead as compared to the transition from the RRC idle state (e.g., the RRC idle 606) to the RRC connected state (e.g., the RRC connected 602). During the RRC inactive state (e.g., the RRC inactive 604), the wireless device may be in a sleep state and mobility of the wireless device may be managed/controlled by the wireless device via a cell reselection. The RRC state may transition from the RRC inactive state (e.g., the RRC inactive 604) to the RRC connected state (e.g., the RRC connected 602) via a connection resume procedure 614. The RRC state may transition from the RRC inactive state (e.g., the RRC inactive 604) to the RRC idle state (e.g., the RRC idle 606) via a connection release procedure 616 that may be the same as or similar to connection release procedure 608.

An RRC state may be associated with a mobility management mechanism. During the RRC idle state (e.g., RRC idle 606) and the RRC inactive state (e.g., the RRC inactive 604), mobility may be managed/controlled by the wireless device via a cell reselection. The purpose of mobility management during the RRC idle state (e.g., the RRC idle 606) or during the RRC inactive state (e.g., the RRC inactive 604) may be to enable/allow the network to be able to notify the wireless device of an event via a paging message without having to broadcast the paging message over the entire mobile communications network. The mobility management mechanism used during the RRC idle state (e.g., the RRC idle 606) or during the RRC idle state (e.g., the RRC inactive 604) may enable/allow the network to track the wireless device on a cell-group level, for example, so that the paging message may be broadcast over the cells of the cell group that the wireless device currently resides within (e.g. instead of sending the paging message over the entire mobile communication network). The mobility management mechanisms for the RRC idle state (e.g., the RRC idle 606) and the RRC inactive state (e.g., the RRC inactive 604) may track the wireless device on a cell-group level. The mobility management mechanisms may do the tracking, for example, using different granularities of grouping. There may be a plurality of levels of cell-grouping granularity (e.g., three levels of cell-grouping granularity: individual cells; cells within a RAN area identified by a RAN area identifier (RAI); and cells within a group of RAN areas, referred to as a tracking area and identified by a tracking area identifier (TAI)).

Tracking areas may be used to track the wireless device (e.g., tracking the location of the wireless device at the CN level). The CN (e.g., the CN 102, the 5G CN 152, or any other CN) may send to the wireless device a list of TAIs associated with a wireless device registration area (e.g., a UE registration area). A wireless device may perform a registration update with the CN to allow the CN to update the location of the wireless device and provide the wireless device with a new the UE registration area, for example, if the wireless device moves (e.g., via a cell reselection) to a cell associated with a TAI that may not be included in the list of TAIs associated with the UE registration area.

RAN areas may be used to track the wireless device (e.g., the location of the wireless device at the RAN level). For a wireless device in an RRC inactive state (e.g., the RRC inactive 604), the wireless device may be assigned/provided/configured with a RAN notification area. A RAN notification area may comprise one or more cell identities (e.g., a list of RAIs and/or a list of TAIs). A base station may belong to one or more RAN notification areas. A cell may belong to one or more RAN notification areas. A wireless device may perform a notification area update with the RAN to update the RAN notification area of the wireless device, for example, if the wireless device moves (e.g., via a cell reselection) to a cell not included in the RAN notification area assigned/provided/configured to the wireless device.

A base station storing an RRC context for a wireless device or a last serving base station of the wireless device may be referred to as an anchor base station. An anchor base station may maintain an RRC context for the wireless device at least during a period of time that the wireless device stays in a RAN notification area of the anchor base station and/or during a period of time that the wireless device stays in an RRC inactive state (e.g., RRC inactive 604).

A base station (e.g., gNBs 160 in FIG. 1B or any other base station) may be split in two parts: a central unit (e.g., a base station central unit, such as a gNB CU) and one or more distributed units (e.g., a base station distributed unit, such as a gNB DU). A base station central unit (CU) may be coupled to one or more base station distributed units (DUs) using an F1 interface (e.g., an F1 interface defined in an NR configuration). The base station CU may comprise the RRC, the PDCP, and the SDAP layers. A base station distributed unit (DU) may comprise the RLC, the MAC, and the PHY layers.

The physical signals and physical channels (e.g., described with respect to FIG. 5A and FIG. 5B) may be mapped onto one or more symbols (e.g., orthogonal frequency divisional multiplexing (OFDM) symbols in an NR configuration or any other symbols). OFDM is a multicarrier communication scheme that sends/transmits data over F orthogonal subcarriers (or tones). The data may be mapped to a series of complex symbols (e.g., M-quadrature amplitude modulation (M-QAM) symbols or M-phase shift keying (M PSK) symbols or any other modulated symbols), referred to as source symbols, and divided into F parallel symbol streams, for example, before transmission of the data. The F parallel symbol streams may be treated as if they are in the frequency domain. The F parallel symbols may be used as inputs to an Inverse Fast Fourier Transform (IFFT) block that transforms them into the time domain. The IFNT block may take in F source symbols at a time, one from each of the F parallel symbol streams. The IFFT block may use each source symbol to modulate the amplitude and phase of one of F sinusoidal basis functions that correspond to the F orthogonal subcarriers. The output of the IFFT block may be F time-domain samples that represent the summation of the F orthogonal subcarriers. The F time-domain samples may form a single OFDM symbol. An OFDM symbol provided/output by the IFNT block may be sent/transmitted over the air interface on a carrier frequency, for example, after one or more processes (e.g., addition of a cyclic prefix) and up-conversion. The F parallel symbol streams may be mixed, for example, using a Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) block before being processed by the IFFT block. This operation may produce Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT)-precoded OFDM symbols and may be used by one or more wireless devices in the uplink to reduce the peak to average power ratio (PAPR). Inverse processing may be performed on the OFDM symbol at a receiver using an FFT block to recover the data mapped to the source symbols.

FIG. 7 shows an example configuration of a frame. The frame may comprise, for example, an NR radio frame into which OFDM symbols may be grouped. A frame (e.g., an NR radio frame) may be identified/indicated by a system frame number (SFN) or any other value. The SFN may repeat with a period of 1024 frames. One NR frame may be 10 milliseconds (ms) in duration and may comprise 10 subframes that are 1 ms in duration. A subframe may be divided into one or more slots (e.g., depending on numerologies and/or different subcarrier spacings). Each of the one or more slots may comprise, for example, 14 OFDM symbols per slot. Any quantity of symbols, slots, or duration may be used for any time interval.

The duration of a slot may depend on the numerology used for the OFDM symbols of the slot. A flexible numerology may be supported, for example, to accommodate different deployments (e.g., cells with carrier frequencies below 1 GHz up to cells with carrier frequencies in the mm-wave range). A flexible numerology may be supported, for example, in an NR configuration or any other radio configurations. A numerology may be defined in terms of subcarrier spacing and/or cyclic prefix duration. Subcarrier spacings may be scaled up by powers of two from a baseline subcarrier spacing of 15 kHz. Cyclic prefix durations may be scaled down by powers of two from a baseline cyclic prefix duration of 4.7 μs, for example, for a numerology in an NR configuration or any other radio configurations. Numerologies may be defined with the following subcarrier spacing/cyclic prefix duration combinations: 15 kHz/4.7 μs; 30 kHz/2.3 μs; 60 kHz/1.2 μs; 120 kHz/0.59 μs; 240 kHz/0.29 μs, and/or any other subcarrier spacing/cyclic prefix duration combinations.

A slot may have a fixed number/quantity of OFDM symbols (e.g., 14 OFDM symbols). A numerology with a higher subcarrier spacing may have a shorter slot duration and more slots per subframe. Examples of numerology-dependent slot duration and slots-per-subframe transmission structure are shown in FIG. 7 (the numerology with a subcarrier spacing of 240 kHz is not shown in FIG. 7). A subframe (e.g., in an NR configuration) may be used as a numerology-independent time reference. A slot may be used as the unit upon which uplink and downlink transmissions are scheduled. Scheduling (e.g., in an NR configuration) may be decoupled from the slot duration. Scheduling may start at any OFDM symbol. Scheduling may last for as many symbols as needed for a transmission, for example, to support low latency. These partial slot transmissions may be referred to as mini-slot or sub-slot transmissions.

FIG. 8 shows an example resource configuration of one or more carriers. The resource configuration of may comprise a slot in the time and frequency domain for an NR carrier or any other carrier. The slot may comprise resource elements (REs) and resource blocks (RBs). A resource element (RE) may be the smallest physical resource (e.g., in an NR configuration). An RE may span one OFDM symbol in the time domain by one subcarrier in the frequency domain, such as shown in FIG. 8. An RB may span twelve consecutive REs in the frequency domain, such as shown in FIG. 8. A carrier (e.g., an NR carrier) may be limited to a width of a certain quantity of RBs and/or subcarriers (e.g., 275 RBs or 275×12=3300 subcarriers). Such limitation(s), if used, may limit the carrier (e.g., NR carrier) frequency based on subcarrier spacing (e.g., carrier frequency of 50, 100, 200, and 400 MHz for subcarrier spacings of 15, 30, 60, and 120 kHz, respectively). A 400 MHz bandwidth may be set based on a 400 MHz per carrier bandwidth limit. Any other bandwidth may be set based on a per carrier bandwidth limit.

A single numerology may be used across the entire bandwidth of a carrier (e.g., an NR such as shown in FIG. 8). In other example configurations, multiple numerologies may be supported on the same carrier. NR and/or other access technologies may support wide carrier bandwidths (e.g., up to 400 MHz for a subcarrier spacing of 120 kHz). Not all wireless devices may be able to receive the full carrier bandwidth (e.g., due to hardware limitations and/or different wireless device capabilities). Receiving and/or utilizing the full carrier bandwidth may be prohibitive, for example, in terms of wireless device power consumption. A wireless device may adapt the size of the receive bandwidth of the wireless device, for example, based on the amount of traffic the wireless device is scheduled to receive (e.g., to reduce power consumption and/or for other purposes). Such an adaptation may be referred to as bandwidth adaptation.

Configuration of one or more bandwidth parts (BWPs) may support one or more wireless devices not capable of receiving the full carrier bandwidth. BWPs may support bandwidth adaptation, for example, for such wireless devices not capable of receiving the full carrier bandwidth. A BWP (e.g., a BWP of an NR configuration) may be defined by a subset of contiguous RBs on a carrier. A wireless device may be configured (e.g., via an RRC layer) with one or more downlink BWPs per serving cell and one or more uplink BWPs per serving cell (e.g., up to four downlink BWPs per serving cell and up to four uplink BWPs per serving cell). One or more of the configured BWPs for a serving cell may be active, for example, at a given time. The one or more BWPs may be referred to as active BWPs of the serving cell. A serving cell may have one or more first active BWPs in the uplink carrier and one or more second active BWPs in the secondary uplink carrier, for example, if the serving cell is configured with a secondary uplink carrier.

A downlink BWP from a set of configured downlink BWPs may be linked with an uplink BWP from a set of configured uplink BWPs (e.g., for unpaired spectra). A downlink BWP and an uplink BWP may be linked, for example, if a downlink BWP index of the downlink BWP and an uplink BWP index of the uplink BWP are the same. A wireless device may expect that the center frequency for a downlink BWP is the same as the center frequency for an uplink BWP (e.g., for unpaired spectra).

A base station may configure a wireless device with one or more control resource sets (CORESETs) for at least one search space. The base station may configure the wireless device with one or more CORESETS, for example, for a downlink BWP in a set of configured downlink BWPs on a primary cell (PCell) or on a secondary cell (SCell). A search space may comprise a set of locations in the time and frequency domains where the wireless device may monitor/find/detect/identify control information. The search space may be a wireless device-specific search space (e.g., a UE-specific search space) or a common search space (e.g., potentially usable by a plurality of wireless devices or a group of wireless user devices). A base station may configure a group of wireless devices with a common search space, on a PCell or on a primary secondary cell (PSCell), in an active downlink BWP.

A base station may configure a wireless device with one or more resource sets for one or more PUCCH transmissions, for example, for an uplink BWP in a set of configured uplink BWPs. A wireless device may receive downlink receptions (e.g., PDCCH or PDSCH) in a downlink BWP, for example, according to a configured numerology (e.g., a configured subcarrier spacing and/or a configured cyclic prefix duration) for the downlink BWP. The wireless device may send/transmit uplink transmissions (e.g., PUCCH or PUSCH) in an uplink BWP, for example, according to a configured numerology (e.g., a configured subcarrier spacing and/or a configured cyclic prefix length for the uplink BWP).

One or more BWP indicator fields may be provided/comprised in Downlink Control Information (DCI). A value of a BWP indicator field may indicate which BWP in a set of configured BWPs is an active downlink BWP for one or more downlink receptions. The value of the one or more BWP indicator fields may indicate an active uplink BWP for one or more uplink transmissions.

A base station may semi-statically configure a wireless device with a default downlink BWP within a set of configured downlink BWPs associated with a PCell. A default downlink BWP may be an initial active downlink BWP, for example, if the base station does not provide/configure a default downlink BWP to/for the wireless device. The wireless device may determine which BWP is the initial active downlink BWP, for example, based on a CORESET configuration obtained using the PBCH.

A base station may configure a wireless device with a BWP inactivity timer value for a PCell. The wireless device may start or restart a BWP inactivity timer at any appropriate time. The wireless device may start or restart the BWP inactivity timer, for example, if one or more conditions are satisfied. The one or more conditions may comprise at least one of: the wireless device detects DCI indicating an active downlink BWP other than a default downlink BWP for a paired spectra operation; the wireless device detects DCI indicating an active downlink BWP other than a default downlink BWP for an unpaired spectra operation; and/or the wireless device detects DCI indicating an active uplink BWP other than a default uplink BWP for an unpaired spectra operation. The wireless device may start/run the BWP inactivity timer toward expiration (e.g., increment from zero to the BWP inactivity timer value, or decrement from the BWP inactivity timer value to zero), for example, if the wireless device does not detect DCI during a time interval (e.g., 1 ms or 0.5 ms). The wireless device may switch from the active downlink BWP to the default downlink BWP, for example, if the BWP inactivity timer expires.

A base station may semi-statically configure a wireless device with one or more BWPs. A wireless device may switch an active BWP from a first BWP to a second BWP, for example, after (e.g., based on or in response to) receiving DCI indicating the second BWP as an active BWP. A wireless device may switch an active BWP from a first BWP to a second BWP, for example, after (e.g., based on or in response to) an expiry of the BWP inactivity timer (e.g., if the second BWP is the default BWP).

A downlink BWP switching may refer to switching an active downlink BWP from a first downlink BWP to a second downlink BWP (e.g., the second downlink BWP is activated and the first downlink BWP is deactivated). An uplink BWP switching may refer to switching an active uplink BWP from a first uplink BWP to a second uplink BWP (e.g., the second uplink BWP is activated and the first uplink BWP is deactivated). Downlink and uplink BWP switching may be performed independently (e.g., in paired spectrum/spectra). Downlink and uplink BWP switching may be performed simultaneously (e.g., in unpaired spectrum/spectra). Switching between configured BWPs may occur, for example, based on RRC signaling, DCI signaling, expiration of a BWP inactivity timer, and/or an initiation of random access.

FIG. 9 shows an example of configured BWPs. Bandwidth adaptation using multiple BWPs (e.g., three configured BWPs for an NR carrier) may be available. A wireless device configured with multiple BWPs (e.g., the three BWPs) may switch from one BWP to another BWP at a switching point. The BWPs may comprise: a BWP 902 having a bandwidth of 40 MHz and a subcarrier spacing of 15 kHz; a BWP 904 having a bandwidth of 10 MHz and a subcarrier spacing of 15 kHz; and a BWP 906 having a bandwidth of 20 MHz and a subcarrier spacing of 60 kHz. The BWP 902 may be an initial active BWP, and the BWP 904 may be a default BWP. The wireless device may switch between BWPs at switching points. The wireless device may switch from the BWP 902 to the BWP 904 at a switching point 908. The switching at the switching point 908 may occur for any suitable reasons. The switching at a switching point 908 may occur, for example, after (e.g., based on or in response to) an expiry of a BWP inactivity timer (e.g., indicating switching to the default BWP). The switching at the switching point 908 may occur, for example, after (e.g., based on or in response to) receiving DCI indicating BWP 904 as the active BWP. The wireless device may switch at a switching point 910 from an active BWP 904 to the BWP 906, for example, after or in response receiving DCI indicating BWP 906 as a new active BWP. The wireless device may switch at a switching point 912 from an active BWP 906 to the BWP 904, for example, after (e.g., based on or in response to) an expiry of a BWP inactivity timer. The wireless device may switch at the switching point 912 from an active BWP 906 to the BWP 904, for example, after or in response receiving DCI indicating BWP 904 as a new active BWP. The wireless device may switch at a switching point 914 from an active BWP 904 to the BWP 902, for example, after or in response receiving DCI indicating the BWP 902 as a new active BWP.

Wireless device procedures for switching BWPs on a secondary cell may be the same/similar as those on a primary cell, for example, if the wireless device is configured for a secondary cell with a default downlink BWP in a set of configured downlink BWPs and a timer value. The wireless device may use the timer value and the default downlink BWP for the secondary cell in the same/similar manner as the wireless device uses the timer value and/or default BWPs for a primary cell. The timer value (e.g., the BWP inactivity timer) may be configured per cell (e.g., for one or more BWPs), for example, via RRC signaling or any other signaling. One or more active BWPs may switch to another BWP, for example, based on an expiration of the BWP inactivity timer.

Two or more carriers may be aggregated and data may be simultaneously sent/transmitted to/from the same wireless device using carrier aggregation (CA) (e.g., to increase data rates). The aggregated carriers in CA may be referred to as component carriers (CCs). There may be a number/quantity of serving cells for the wireless device (e.g., one serving cell for a CC), for example, if CA is configured/used. The CCs may have multiple configurations in the frequency domain.

FIG. 10A shows example CA configurations based on CCs. As shown in FIG. 10A, three types of CA configurations may comprise an intraband (contiguous) configuration 1002, an intraband (non-contiguous) configuration 1004, and/or an interband configuration 1006. In the intraband (contiguous) configuration 1002, two CCs may be aggregated in the same frequency band (frequency band A) and may be located directly adjacent to each other within the frequency band. In the intraband (non-contiguous) configuration 1004, two CCs may be aggregated in the same frequency band (frequency band A) but may be separated from each other in the frequency band by a gap. In the interband configuration 1006, two CCs may be located in different frequency bands (e.g., frequency band A and frequency band B, respectively).

A network may set the maximum quantity of CCs that can be aggregated (e.g., up to 32 CCs may be aggregated in NR, or any other quantity may be aggregated in other systems). The aggregated CCs may have the same or different bandwidths, subcarrier spacing, and/or duplexing schemes (TDD, FDD, or any other duplexing schemes). A serving cell for a wireless device using CA may have a downlink CC. One or more uplink CCs may be optionally configured for a serving cell (e.g., for FDD). The ability to aggregate more downlink carriers than uplink carriers may be useful, for example, if the wireless device has more data traffic in the downlink than in the uplink.

One of the aggregated cells for a wireless device may be referred to as a primary cell (PCell), for example, if a CA is configured. The PCell may be the serving cell that the wireless initially connects to or access to, for example, during or at an RRC connection establishment, an RRC connection reestablishment, and/or a handover. The PCell may provide/configure the wireless device with NAS mobility information and the security input. Wireless device may have different PCells. For the downlink, the carrier corresponding to the PCell may be referred to as the downlink primary CC (DL PCC). For the uplink, the carrier corresponding to the PCell may be referred to as the uplink primary CC (UL PCC). The other aggregated cells (e.g., associated with CCs other than the DL PCC and UL PCC) for the wireless device may be referred to as secondary cells (SCells). The SCells may be configured, for example, after the PCell is configured for the wireless device. An SCell may be configured via an RRC connection reconfiguration procedure. For the downlink, the carrier corresponding to an SCell may be referred to as a downlink secondary CC (DL SCC). For the uplink, the carrier corresponding to the SCell may be referred to as the uplink secondary CC (UL SCC).

Configured SCells for a wireless device may be activated or deactivated, for example, based on traffic and channel conditions. Deactivation of an SCell may cause the wireless device to stop PDCCH and PDSCH reception on the SCell and PUSCH, SRS, and CQI transmissions on the SCell. Configured SCells may be activated or deactivated, for example, using a MAC CE (e.g., the MAC CE described with respect to FIG. 4B). A MAC CE may use a bitmap (e.g., one bit per SCell) to indicate which SCells (e.g., in a subset of configured SCells) for the wireless device are activated or deactivated. Configured SCells may be deactivated, for example, after (e.g., based on or in response to) an expiration of an SCell deactivation timer (e.g., one SCell deactivation timer per SCell may be configured).

DCI may comprise control information, such as scheduling assignments and scheduling grants, for a cell. DCI may be sent/transmitted via the cell corresponding to the scheduling assignments and/or scheduling grants, which may be referred to as a self-scheduling. DCI comprising control information for a cell may be sent/transmitted via another cell, which may be referred to as a cross-carrier scheduling. Uplink control information (UCI) may comprise control information, such as HARQ acknowledgments and channel state feedback (e.g., CQI, PMI, and/or RI) for aggregated cells. UCI may be sent/transmitted via an uplink control channel (e.g., a PUCCH) of the PCell or a certain SCell (e.g., an SCell configured with PUCCH). For a larger number of aggregated downlink CCs, the PUCCH of the PCell may become overloaded. Cells may be divided into multiple PUCCH groups.

FIG. 10B shows example group of cells. Aggregated cells may be configured into one or more PUCCH groups (e.g., as shown in FIG. 10B). One or more cell groups or one or more uplink control channel groups (e.g., a PUCCH group 1010 and a PUCCH group 1050) may comprise one or more downlink CCs, respectively. The PUCCH group 1010 may comprise one or more downlink CCs, for example, three downlink CCs: a PCell 1011 (e.g., a DL PCC), an SCell 1012 (e.g., a DL SCC), and an SCell 1013 (e.g., a DL SCC). The PUCCH group 1050 may comprise one or more downlink CCs, for example, three downlink CCs: a PUCCH SCell (or PSCell) 1051 (e.g., a DL SCC), an SCell 1052 (e.g., a DL SCC), and an SCell 1053 (e.g., a DL SCC). One or more uplink CCs of the PUCCH group 1010 may be configured as a PCell 1021 (e.g., a UL PCC), an SCell 1022 (e.g., a UL SCC), and an SCell 1023 (e.g., a UL SCC). One or more uplink CCs of the PUCCH group 1050 may be configured as a PUCCH SCell (or PSCell) 1061 (e.g., a UL SCC), an SCell 1062 (e.g., a UL SCC), and an SCell 1063 (e.g., a UL SCC). UCI related to the downlink CCs of the PUCCH group 1010, shown as UCI 1031, UCI 1032, and UCI 1033, may be sent/transmitted via the uplink of the PCell 1021 (e.g., via the PUCCH of the PCell 1021). UCI related to the downlink CCs of the PUCCH group 1050, shown as UCI 1071, UCI 1072, and UCI 1073, may be sent/transmitted via the uplink of the PUCCH SCell (or PSCell) 1061 (e.g., via the PUCCH of the PUCCH SCell 1061). A single uplink PCell may be configured to send/transmit UCI relating to the six downlink CCs, for example, if the aggregated cells shown in FIG. 10B are not divided into the PUCCH group 1010 and the PUCCH group 1050. The PCell 1021 may become overloaded, for example, if the UCIs 1031, 1032, 1033, 1071, 1072, and 1073 are sent/transmitted via the PCell 1021. By dividing transmissions of UCI between the PCell 1021 and the PUCCH SCell (or PSCell) 1061, overloading may be prevented and/or reduced.

A PCell may comprise a downlink carrier (e.g., the PCell 1011) and an uplink carrier (e.g., the PCell 1021). An SCell may comprise only a downlink carrier. A cell, comprising a downlink carrier and optionally an uplink carrier, may be assigned with a physical cell ID and a cell index. The physical cell ID or the cell index may indicate/identify a downlink carrier and/or an uplink carrier of the cell, for example, depending on the context in which the physical cell ID is used. A physical cell ID may be determined, for example, using a synchronization signal (e.g., PSS and/or SSS) sent/transmitted via a downlink component carrier. A cell index may be determined, for example, using one or more RRC messages. A physical cell ID may be referred to as a carrier ID, and a cell index may be referred to as a carrier index. A first physical cell ID for a first downlink carrier may refer to the first physical cell ID for a cell comprising the first downlink carrier. Substantially the same/similar concept may apply to, for example, a carrier activation. Activation of a first carrier may refer to activation of a cell comprising the first carrier.

A multi-carrier nature of a PHY layer may be exposed/indicated to a MAC layer (e.g., in a CA configuration). A HARQ entity may operate on a serving cell. A transport block may be generated per assignment/grant per serving cell. A transport block and potential HARQ retransmissions of the transport block may be mapped to a serving cell.

For the downlink, a base station may send/transmit (e.g., unicast, multicast, and/or broadcast), to one or more wireless devices, one or more reference signals (RSs) (e.g., PSS, SSS, CSI-RS, DM-RS, and/or PT-RS). For the uplink, the one or more wireless devices may send/transmit one or more RSs to the base station (e.g., DM-RS, PT-RS, and/or SRS). The PSS and the SSS may be sent/transmitted by the base station and used by the one or more wireless devices to synchronize the one or more wireless devices with the base station. A synchronization signal (SS)/physical broadcast channel (PBCH) block may comprise the PSS, the SSS, and the PBCH. The base station may periodically send/transmit a burst of SS/PBCH blocks, which may be referred to as SSBs.

FIG. 11A shows an example mapping of one or more SS/PBCH blocks. A burst of SS/PBCH blocks may comprise one or more SS/PBCH blocks (e.g., 4 SS/PBCH blocks, as shown in FIG. 11A). Bursts may be sent/transmitted periodically (e.g., every 2 frames, 20 ms, or any other durations). A burst may be restricted to a half-frame (e.g., a first half-frame having a duration of 5 ms). Such parameters (e.g., the number of SS/PBCH blocks per burst, periodicity of bursts, position of the burst within the frame) may be configured, for example, based on at least one of: a carrier frequency of a cell in which the SS/PBCH block is sent/transmitted; a numerology or subcarrier spacing of the cell; a configuration by the network (e.g., using RRC signaling); and/or any other suitable factor(s). A wireless device may assume a subcarrier spacing for the SS/PBCH block based on the carrier frequency being monitored, for example, unless the radio network configured the wireless device to assume a different subcarrier spacing.

The SS/PBCH block may span one or more OFDM symbols in the time domain (e.g., 4 OFDM symbols, as shown in FIG. 11A or any other quantity/number of symbols) and may span one or more subcarriers in the frequency domain (e.g., 240 contiguous subcarriers or any other quantity/number of subcarriers). The PSS, the SSS, and the PBCH may have a common center frequency. The PSS may be sent/transmitted first and may span, for example, 1 OFDM symbol and 127 subcarriers. The SSS may be sent/transmitted after the PSS (e.g., two symbols later) and may span 1 OFDM symbol and 127 subcarriers. The PBCH may be sent/transmitted after the PSS (e.g., across the next 3 OFDM symbols) and may span 240 subcarriers (e.g., in the second and fourth OFDM symbols as shown in FIG. 11A) and/or may span fewer than 240 subcarriers (e.g., in the third OFDM symbols as shown in FIG. 11A).

The location of the SS/PBCH block in the time and frequency domains may not be known to the wireless device (e.g., if the wireless device is searching for the cell). The wireless device may monitor a carrier for the PSS, for example, to find and select the cell. The wireless device may monitor a frequency location within the carrier. The wireless device may search for the PSS at a different frequency location within the carrier, for example, if the PSS is not found after a certain duration (e.g., 20 ms). The wireless device may search for the PSS at a different frequency location within the carrier, for example, as indicated by a synchronization raster. The wireless device may determine the locations of the SSS and the PBCH, respectively, for example, based on a known structure of the SS/PBCH block if the PSS is found at a location in the time and frequency domains. The SS/PBCH block may be a cell-defining SS block (CD-SSB). A primary cell may be associated with a CD-SSB. The CD-SSB may be located on a synchronization raster. A cell selection/search and/or reselection may be based on the CD-SSB.

The SS/PBCH block may be used by the wireless device to determine one or more parameters of the cell. The wireless device may determine a physical cell identifier (PCI) of the cell, for example, based on the sequences of the PSS and the SSS, respectively. The wireless device may determine a location of a frame boundary of the cell, for example, based on the location of the SS/PBCH block. The SS/PBCH block may indicate that it has been sent/transmitted in accordance with a transmission pattern. An SS/PBCH block in the transmission pattern may be a known distance from the frame boundary (e.g., a predefined distance for a RAN configuration among one or more networks, one or more base stations, and one or more wireless devices).

The PBCH may use a QPSK modulation and/or forward error correction (FEC). The FEC may use polar coding. One or more symbols spanned by the PBCH may comprise/carry one or more DM-RSs for demodulation of the PBCH. The PBCH may comprise an indication of a current system frame number (SFN) of the cell and/or a SS/PBCH block timing index. These parameters may facilitate time synchronization of the wireless device to the base station. The PBCH may comprise a MIB used to send/transmit to the wireless device one or more parameters. The MIB may be used by the wireless device to locate remaining minimum system information (RMSI) associated with the cell. The RMSI may comprise a System Information Block Type 1 (SIB1). The SIB1 may comprise information for the wireless device to access the cell. The wireless device may use one or more parameters of the MIB to monitor a PDCCH, which may be used to schedule a PDSCH. The PDSCH may comprise the SIB1. The SIB1 may be decoded using parameters provided/comprised in the MIB. The PBCH may indicate an absence of SIB1. The wireless device may be pointed to a frequency, for example, based on the PBCH indicating the absence of SIB1. The wireless device may search for an SS/PBCH block at the frequency to which the wireless device is pointed.

The wireless device may assume that one or more SS/PBCH blocks sent/transmitted with a same SS/PBCH block index are quasi co-located (QCLed) (e.g., having substantially the same/similar Doppler spread, Doppler shift, average gain, average delay, and/or spatial Rx parameters). The wireless device may not assume QCL for SS/PBCH block transmissions having different SS/PBCH block indexes. SS/PBCH blocks (e.g., those within a half-frame) may be sent/transmitted in spatial directions (e.g., using different beams that span a coverage area of the cell). A first SS/PBCH block may be sent/transmitted in a first spatial direction using a first beam, a second SS/PBCH block may be sent/transmitted in a second spatial direction using a second beam, a third SS/PBCH block may be sent/transmitted in a third spatial direction using a third beam, a fourth SS/PBCH block may be sent/transmitted in a fourth spatial direction using a fourth beam, etc.

A base station may send/transmit a plurality of SS/PBCH blocks, for example, within a frequency span of a carrier. A first PCI of a first SS/PBCH block of the plurality of SS/PBCH blocks may be different from a second PCI of a second SS/PBCH block of the plurality of SS/PBCH blocks. The PCIs of SS/PBCH blocks sent/transmitted in different frequency locations may be different or substantially the same.

The CSI-RS may be sent/transmitted by the base station and used by the wireless device to acquire/obtain/determine channel state information (CSI). The base station may configure the wireless device with one or more CSI-RSs for channel estimation or any other suitable purpose. The base station may configure a wireless device with one or more of the same/similar CSI-RSs. The wireless device may measure the one or more CSI-RSs. The wireless device may estimate a downlink channel state and/or generate a CSI report, for example, based on the measuring of the one or more downlink CSI-RSs. The wireless device may send/transmit the CSI report to the base station (e.g., based on periodic CSI reporting, semi-persistent CSI reporting, and/or aperiodic CSI reporting). The base station may use feedback provided by the wireless device (e.g., the estimated downlink channel state) to perform a link adaptation.

The base station may semi-statically configure the wireless device with one or more CSI-RS resource sets. A CSI-RS resource may be associated with a location in the time and frequency domains and a periodicity. The base station may selectively activate and/or deactivate a CSI-RS resource. The base station may indicate to the wireless device that a CSI-RS resource in the CSI-RS resource set is activated and/or deactivated.

The base station may configure the wireless device to report CSI measurements. The base station may configure the wireless device to provide CSI reports periodically, aperiodically, or semi-persistently. For periodic CSI reporting, the wireless device may be configured with a timing and/or periodicity of a plurality of CSI reports. For aperiodic CSI reporting, the base station may request a CSI report. The base station may command the wireless device to measure a configured CSI-RS resource and provide a CSI report relating to the measurement(s). For semi-persistent CSI reporting, the base station may configure the wireless device to send/transmit periodically, and selectively activate or deactivate the periodic reporting (e.g., via one or more activation/deactivation MAC CEs and/or one or more DCIs). The base station may configure the wireless device with a CSI-RS resource set and CSI reports, for example, using RRC signaling.

The CSI-RS configuration may comprise one or more parameters indicating, for example, up to 32 antenna ports (or any other quantity of antenna ports). The wireless device may be configured to use/employ the same OFDM symbols for a downlink CSI-RS and a CORESET, for example, if the downlink CSI-RS and CORESET are spatially QCLed and resource elements associated with the downlink CSI-RS are outside of the physical resource blocks (PRBs) configured for the CORESET. The wireless device may be configured to use/employ the same OFDM symbols for a downlink CSI-RS and SS/PBCH blocks, for example, if the downlink CSI-RS and SS/PBCH blocks are spatially QCLed and resource elements associated with the downlink CSI-RS are outside of PRBs configured for the SS/PBCH blocks.

Downlink DM-RSs may be sent/transmitted by a base station and received/used by a wireless device for a channel estimation. The downlink DM-RSs may be used for coherent demodulation of one or more downlink physical channels (e.g., PDSCH). A network (e.g., an NR network) may support one or more variable and/or configurable DM-RS patterns for data demodulation. At least one downlink DM-RS configuration may support a front-loaded DM-RS pattern. A front-loaded DM-RS may be mapped over one or more OFDM symbols (e.g., one or two adjacent OFDM symbols). A base station may semi-statically configure the wireless device with a number/quantity (e.g. a maximum number/quantity) of front-loaded DM-RS symbols for a PDSCH. A DM-RS configuration may support one or more DM-RS ports. A DM-RS configuration may support up to eight orthogonal downlink DM-RS ports per wireless device (e.g., for single user-MIMO). A DM-RS configuration may support up to 4 orthogonal downlink DM-RS ports per wireless device (e.g., for multiuser-MIMO). A radio network may support (e.g., at least for CP-OFDM) a common DM-RS structure for downlink and uplink. A DM-RS location, a DM-RS pattern, and/or a scrambling sequence may be the same or different. The base station may send/transmit a downlink DM-RS and a corresponding PDSCH, for example, using the same precoding matrix. The wireless device may use the one or more downlink DM-RSs for coherent demodulation/channel estimation of the PDSCH.

A transmitter (e.g., a transmitter of a base station) may use a precoder matrices for a part of a transmission bandwidth. The transmitter may use a first precoder matrix for a first bandwidth and a second precoder matrix for a second bandwidth. The first precoder matrix and the second precoder matrix may be different, for example, based on the first bandwidth being different from the second bandwidth. The wireless device may assume that a same precoding matrix is used across a set of PRBs. The set of PRBs may be determined/indicated/identified/denoted as a precoding resource block group (PRG).

A PDSCH may comprise one or more layers. The wireless device may assume that at least one symbol with DM-RS is present on a layer of the one or more layers of the PDSCH. A higher layer may configure one or more DM-RSs for a PDSCH (e.g., up to 3 DMRSs for the PDSCH). Downlink PT-RS may be sent/transmitted by a base station and used by a wireless device, for example, for a phase-noise compensation. Whether a downlink PT-RS is present or not may depend on an RRC configuration. The presence and/or the pattern of the downlink PT-RS may be configured on a wireless device-specific basis, for example, using a combination of RRC signaling and/or an association with one or more parameters used/employed for other purposes (e.g., modulation and coding scheme (MCS)), which may be indicated by DCI. A dynamic presence of a downlink PT-RS, if configured, may be associated with one or more DCI parameters comprising at least MCS. A network (e.g., an NR network) may support a plurality of PT-RS densities defined in the time and/or frequency domains. A frequency domain density (if configured/present) may be associated with at least one configuration of a scheduled bandwidth. The wireless device may assume a same precoding for a DM-RS port and a PT-RS port. The quantity/number of PT-RS ports may be fewer than the quantity/number of DM-RS ports in a scheduled resource. Downlink PT-RS may be configured/allocated/confined in the scheduled time/frequency duration for the wireless device. Downlink PT-RS may be sent/transmitted via symbols, for example, to facilitate a phase tracking at the receiver.

The wireless device may send/transmit an uplink DM-RS to a base station, for example, for a channel estimation. The base station may use the uplink DM-RS for coherent demodulation of one or more uplink physical channels. The wireless device may send/transmit an uplink DM-RS with a PUSCH and/or a PUCCH. The uplink DM-RS may span a range of frequencies that is similar to a range of frequencies associated with the corresponding physical channel The base station may configure the wireless device with one or more uplink DM-RS configurations. At least one DM-RS configuration may support a front-loaded DM-RS pattern. The front-loaded DM-RS may be mapped over one or more OFDM symbols (e.g., one or two adjacent OFDM symbols). One or more uplink DM-RSs may be configured to send/transmit at one or more symbols of a PUSCH and/or a PUCCH. The base station may semi-statically configure the wireless device with a number/quantity (e.g. the maximum number/quantity) of front-loaded DM-RS symbols for the PUSCH and/or the PUCCH, which the wireless device may use to schedule a single-symbol DM-RS and/or a double-symbol DM-RS. A network (e.g., an NR network) may support (e.g., for cyclic prefix orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (CP-OFDM)) a common DM-RS structure for downlink and uplink. A DM-RS location, a DM-RS pattern, and/or a scrambling sequence for the DM-RS may be substantially the same or different.

A PUSCH may comprise one or more layers. A wireless device may send/transmit at least one symbol with DM-RS present on a layer of the one or more layers of the PUSCH. A higher layer may configure one or more DM-RSs (e.g., up to three DMRSs) for the PUSCH. Uplink PT-RS (which may be used by a base station for a phase tracking and/or a phase-noise compensation) may or may not be present, for example, depending on an RRC configuration of the wireless device. The presence and/or the pattern of an uplink PT-RS may be configured on a wireless device-specific basis (e.g., a UE-specific basis), for example, by a combination of RRC signaling and/or one or more parameters configured/employed for other purposes (e.g., MCS), which may be indicated by DCI. A dynamic presence of an uplink PT-RS, if configured, may be associated with one or more DCI parameters comprising at least MCS. A radio network may support a plurality of uplink PT-RS densities defined in time/frequency domain. A frequency domain density (if configured/present) may be associated with at least one configuration of a scheduled bandwidth. The wireless device may assume a same precoding for a DM-RS port and a PT-RS port. A quantity/number of PT-RS ports may be less than a quantity/number of DM-RS ports in a scheduled resource. An uplink PT-RS may be configured/allocated/confined in the scheduled time/frequency duration for the wireless device.

One or more SRSs may be sent/transmitted by a wireless device to a base station, for example, for a channel state estimation to support uplink channel dependent scheduling and/or a link adaptation. SRS sent/transmitted by the wireless device may enable/allow a base station to estimate an uplink channel state at one or more frequencies. A scheduler at the base station may use/employ the estimated uplink channel state to assign one or more resource blocks for an uplink PUSCH transmission for the wireless device. The base station may semi-statically configure the wireless device with one or more SRS resource sets. For an SRS resource set, the base station may configure the wireless device with one or more SRS resources. An SRS resource set applicability may be configured, for example, by a higher layer (e.g., RRC) parameter. An SRS resource in a SRS resource set of the one or more SRS resource sets (e.g., with the same/similar time domain behavior, periodic, aperiodic, and/or the like) may be sent/transmitted at a time instant (e.g., simultaneously), for example, if a higher layer parameter indicates beam management. The wireless device may send/transmit one or more SRS resources in SRS resource sets. A network (e.g., an NR network) may support aperiodic, periodic, and/or semi-persistent SRS transmissions. The wireless device may send/transmit SRS resources, for example, based on one or more trigger types. The one or more trigger types may comprise higher layer signaling (e.g., RRC) and/or one or more DCI formats. At least one DCI format may be used/employed for the wireless device to select at least one of one or more configured SRS resource sets. An SRS trigger type 0 may refer to an SRS triggered based on higher layer signaling. An SRS trigger type 1 may refer to an SRS triggered based on one or more DCI formats. The wireless device may be configured to send/transmit an SRS, for example, after a transmission of a PUSCH and a corresponding uplink DM-RS if a PUSCH and an SRS are sent/transmitted in a same slot. A base station may semi-statically configure a wireless device with one or more SRS configuration parameters indicating at least one of following: a SRS resource configuration identifier; a number of SRS ports; time domain behavior of an SRS resource configuration (e.g., an indication of periodic, semi-persistent, or aperiodic SRS); slot, mini-slot, and/or subframe level periodicity; an offset for a periodic and/or an aperiodic SRS resource; a number of OFDM symbols in an SRS resource; a starting OFDM symbol of an SRS resource; an SRS bandwidth; a frequency hopping bandwidth; a cyclic shift; and/or an SRS sequence ID.

An antenna port may be determined/defined such that the channel over which a symbol on the antenna port is conveyed can be inferred from the channel over which another symbol on the same antenna port is conveyed. The receiver may infer/determine the channel (e.g., fading gain, multipath delay, and/or the like) for conveying a second symbol on an antenna port, from the channel for conveying a first symbol on the antenna port, for example, if the first symbol and the second symbol are sent/transmitted on the same antenna port. A first antenna port and a second antenna port may be referred to as quasi co-located (QCLed), for example, if one or more large-scale properties of the channel over which a first symbol on the first antenna port is conveyed may be inferred from the channel over which a second symbol on a second antenna port is conveyed. The one or more large-scale properties may comprise at least one of: a delay spread; a Doppler spread; a Doppler shift; an average gain; an average delay; and/or spatial Receiving (Rx) parameters.

Channels that use beamforming may require beam management. Beam management may comprise a beam measurement, a beam selection, and/or a beam indication. A beam may be associated with one or more reference signals. A beam may be identified by one or more beamformed reference signals. The wireless device may perform a downlink beam measurement, for example, based on one or more downlink reference signals (e.g., a CSI-RS) and generate a beam measurement report. The wireless device may perform the downlink beam measurement procedure, for example, after an RRC connection is set up with a base station.

FIG. 11B shows an example mapping of one or more CSI-RSs. The CSI-RSs may be mapped in the time and frequency domains. Each rectangular block shown in FIG. 11B may correspond to a resource block (RB) within a bandwidth of a cell. A base station may send/transmit one or more RRC messages comprising CSI-RS resource configuration parameters indicating one or more CSI-RSs. One or more of parameters may be configured by higher layer signaling (e.g., RRC and/or MAC signaling) for a CSI-RS resource configuration. The one or more of the parameters may comprise at least one of: a CSI-RS resource configuration identity, a number of CSI-RS ports, a CSI-RS configuration (e.g., symbol and resource element (RE) locations in a subframe), a CSI-RS subframe configuration (e.g., a subframe location, an offset, and periodicity in a radio frame), a CSI-RS power parameter, a CSI-RS sequence parameter, a code division multiplexing (CDM) type parameter, a frequency density, a transmission comb, quasi co-location (QCL) parameters (e.g., QCL-scramblingidentity, crs-portscount, mbsfn-subframeconfiglist, csi-rs-configZPid, qcl-csi-rs-configNZPid), and/or other radio resource parameters.

One or more beams may be configured for a wireless device in a wireless device-specific configuration. Three beams are shown in FIG. 11B (beam #1, beam #2, and beam #3), but more or fewer beams may be configured. Beam #1 may be allocated with CSI-RS 1101 that may be sent/transmitted in one or more subcarriers in an RB of a first symbol. Beam #2 may be allocated with CSI-RS 1102 that may be sent/transmitted in one or more subcarriers in an RB of a second symbol. Beam #3 may be allocated with CSI-RS 1103 that may be sent/transmitted in one or more subcarriers in an RB of a third symbol. A base station may use other subcarriers in the same RB (e.g., those that are not used to send/transmit CSI-RS 1101) to transmit another CSI-RS associated with a beam for another wireless device, for example, by using frequency division multiplexing (FDM). Beams used for a wireless device may be configured such that beams for the wireless device use symbols different from symbols used by beams of other wireless devices, for example, by using time domain multiplexing (TDM). A wireless device may be served with beams in orthogonal symbols (e.g., no overlapping symbols), for example, by using the TDM.

CSI-RSs (e.g., CSI-RSs 1101, 1102, 1103) may be sent/transmitted by the base station and used by the wireless device for one or more measurements. The wireless device may measure an RSRP of configured CSI-RS resources. The base station may configure the wireless device with a reporting configuration, and the wireless device may report the RSRP measurements to a network (e.g., via one or more base stations) based on the reporting configuration. The base station may determine, based on the reported measurement results, one or more transmission configuration indication (TCI) states comprising a number of reference signals. The base station may indicate one or more TCI states to the wireless device (e.g., via RRC signaling, a MAC CE, and/or DCI). The wireless device may receive a downlink transmission with an Rx beam determined based on the one or more TCI states. The wireless device may or may not have a capability of beam correspondence. The wireless device may determine a spatial domain filter of a transmit (Tx) beam, for example, based on a spatial domain filter of the corresponding Rx beam, if the wireless device has the capability of beam correspondence. The wireless device may perform an uplink beam selection procedure to determine the spatial domain filter of the Tx beam, for example, if the wireless device does not have the capability of beam correspondence. The wireless device may perform the uplink beam selection procedure, for example, based on one or more sounding reference signal (SRS) resources configured to the wireless device by the base station. The base station may select and indicate uplink beams for the wireless device, for example, based on measurements of the one or more SRS resources sent/transmitted by the wireless device.

A wireless device may determine/assess (e.g., measure) a channel quality of one or more beam pair links, for example, in a beam management procedure. A beam pair link may comprise a Tx beam of a base station and an Rx beam of the wireless device. The Tx beam of the base station may send/transmit a downlink signal, and the Rx beam of the wireless device may receive the downlink signal. The wireless device may send/transmit a beam measurement report, for example, based on the assessment/determination. The beam measurement report may indicate one or more beam pair quality parameters comprising at least one of: one or more beam identifications (e.g., a beam index, a reference signal index, or the like), an RSRP, a precoding matrix indicator (PMI), a channel quality indicator (CQI), and/or a rank indicator (RI).

FIG. 12A shows examples of downlink beam management procedures. One or more downlink beam management procedures (e.g., downlink beam management procedures P1, P2, and P3) may be performed. Procedure P1 may enable a measurement (e.g., a wireless device measurement) on Tx beams of a TRP (or multiple TRPs) (e.g., to support a selection of one or more base station Tx beams and/or wireless device Rx beams). The Tx beams of a base station and the Rx beams of a wireless device are shown as ovals in the top row of P1 and bottom row of P1, respectively. Beamforming (e.g., at a TRP) may comprise a Tx beam sweep for a set of beams (e.g., the beam sweeps shown, in the top rows of P1 and P2, as ovals rotated in a counter-clockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrows). Beamforming (e.g., at a wireless device) may comprise an Rx beam sweep for a set of beams (e.g., the beam sweeps shown, in the bottom rows of P1 and P3, as ovals rotated in a clockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrows). Procedure P2 may be used to enable a measurement (e.g., a wireless device measurement) on Tx beams of a TRP (shown, in the top row of P2, as ovals rotated in a counter-clockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrow). The wireless device and/or the base station may perform procedure P2, for example, using a smaller set of beams than the set of beams used in procedure P1, or using narrower beams than the beams used in procedure P1. Procedure P2 may be referred to as a beam refinement. The wireless device may perform procedure P3 for an Rx beam determination, for example, by using the same Tx beam(s) of the base station and sweeping Rx beam(s) of the wireless device.

FIG. 12B shows examples of uplink beam management procedures. One or more uplink beam management procedures (e.g., uplink beam management procedures U1, U2, and U3) may be performed. Procedure U1 may be used to enable a base station to perform a measurement on Tx beams of a wireless device (e.g., to support a selection of one or more Tx beams of the wireless device and/or Rx beams of the base station). The Tx beams of the wireless device and the Rx beams of the base station are shown as ovals in the top row of U1 and bottom row of U1, respectively). Beamforming (e.g., at the wireless device) may comprise one or more beam sweeps, for example, a Tx beam sweep from a set of beams (shown, in the bottom rows of U1 and U3, as ovals rotated in a clockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrows). Beamforming (e.g., at the base station) may comprise one or more beam sweeps, for example, an Rx beam sweep from a set of beams (shown, in the top rows of U1 and U2, as ovals rotated in a counter-clockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrows). Procedure U2 may be used to enable the base station to adjust its Rx beam, for example, if the UE uses a fixed Tx beam. The wireless device and/or the base station may perform procedure U2, for example, using a smaller set of beams than the set of beams used in procedure P1, or using narrower beams than the beams used in procedure P1. Procedure U2 may be referred to as a beam refinement. The wireless device may perform procedure U3 to adjust its Tx beam, for example, if the base station uses a fixed Rx beam.

A wireless device may initiate/start/perform a beam failure recovery (BFR) procedure, for example, based on detecting a beam failure. The wireless device may send/transmit a BFR request (e.g., a preamble, UCI, an SR, a MAC CE, and/or the like), for example, based on the initiating the BFR procedure. The wireless device may detect the beam failure, for example, based on a determination that a quality of beam pair link(s) of an associated control channel is unsatisfactory (e.g., having an error rate higher than an error rate threshold, a received signal power lower than a received signal power threshold, an expiration of a timer, and/or the like).

The wireless device may measure a quality of a beam pair link, for example, using one or more reference signals (RSs) comprising one or more SS/PBCH blocks, one or more CSI-RS resources, and/or one or more DM-RSs. A quality of the beam pair link may be based on one or more of a block error rate (BLER), an RSRP value, a signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR) value, an RSRQ value, and/or a CSI value measured on RS resources. The base station may indicate that an RS resource is QCLed with one or more DM-RSs of a channel (e.g., a control channel, a shared data channel, and/or the like). The RS resource and the one or more DM-RSs of the channel may be QCLed, for example, if the channel characteristics (e.g., Doppler shift, Doppler spread, an average delay, delay spread, a spatial Rx parameter, fading, and/or the like) from a transmission via the RS resource to the wireless device are similar or the same as the channel characteristics from a transmission via the channel to the wireless device.

A network (e.g., an NR network comprising a gNB and/or an ng-eNB) and/or the wireless device may initiate/start/perform a random access procedure. A wireless device in an RRC idle (e.g., an RRC_IDLE) state and/or an RRC inactive (e.g., an RRC_INACTIVE) state may initiate/perform the random access procedure to request a connection setup to a network. The wireless device may initiate/start/perform the random access procedure from an RRC connected (e.g., an RRC_CONNECTED) state. The wireless device may initiate/start/perform the random access procedure to request uplink resources (e.g., for uplink transmission of an SR if there is no PUCCH resource available) and/or acquire/obtain/determine an uplink timing (e.g., if an uplink synchronization status is non-synchronized). The wireless device may initiate/start/perform the random access procedure to request one or more system information blocks (SIBs) (e.g., other system information blocks, such as SIB2, SIB3, and/or the like). The wireless device may initiate/start/perform the random access procedure for a beam failure recovery request. A network may initiate/start/perform a random access procedure, for example, for a handover and/or for establishing time alignment for an SCell addition.

FIG. 13A shows an example four-step random access procedure. The four-step random access procedure may comprise a four-step contention-based random access procedure. A base station may send/transmit a configuration message 1310 to a wireless device, for example, before initiating the random access procedure. The four-step random access procedure may comprise transmissions of four messages comprising: a first message (e.g., Msg 1 1311), a second message (e.g., Msg 2 1312), a third message (e.g., Msg 3 1313), and a fourth message (e.g., Msg 4 1314). The first message (e.g., Msg 1 1311) may comprise a preamble (or a random access preamble). The first message (e.g., Msg 1 1311) may be referred to as a preamble. The second message (e.g., Msg 2 1312) may comprise as a random access response (RAR). The second message (e.g., Msg 2 1312) may be referred to as an RAR.

The configuration message 1310 may be sent/transmitted, for example, using one or more RRC messages. The one or more RRC messages may indicate one or more random access channel (RACH) parameters to the wireless device. The one or more RACH parameters may comprise at least one of: general parameters for one or more random access procedures (e.g., RACH-configGeneral); cell-specific parameters (e.g., RACH-ConfigCommon); and/or dedicated parameters (e.g., RACH-configDedicated). The base station may send/transmit (e.g., broadcast or multicast) the one or more RRC messages to one or more wireless devices. The one or more RRC messages may be wireless device-specific. The one or more RRC messages that are wireless device-specific may be, for example, dedicated RRC messages sent/transmitted to a wireless device in an RRC connected (e.g., an RRC_CONNECTED) state and/or in an RRC inactive (e.g., an RRC_INACTIVE) state. The wireless devices may determine, based on the one or more RACH parameters, a time-frequency resource and/or an uplink transmit power for transmission of the first message (e.g., Msg 1 1311) and/or the third message (e.g., Msg 3 1313). The wireless device may determine a reception timing and a downlink channel for receiving the second message (e.g., Msg 2 1312) and the fourth message (e.g., Msg 4 1314), for example, based on the one or more RACH parameters.

The one or more RACH parameters provided/configured/comprised in the configuration message 1310 may indicate one or more Physical RACH (PRACH) occasions available for transmission of the first message (e.g., Msg 1 1311). The one or more PRACH occasions may be predefined (e.g., by a network comprising one or more base stations). The one or more RACH parameters may indicate one or more available sets of one or more PRACH occasions (e.g., prach-ConfigIndex). The one or more RACH parameters may indicate an association between (a) one or more PRACH occasions and (b) one or more reference signals. The one or more RACH parameters may indicate an association between (a) one or more preambles and (b) one or more reference signals. The one or more reference signals may be SS/PBCH blocks and/or CSI-RSs. The one or more RACH parameters may indicate a quantity/number of SS/PBCH blocks mapped to a PRACH occasion and/or a quantity/number of preambles mapped to a SS/PBCH blocks.

The one or more RACH parameters provided/configured/comprised in the configuration message 1310 may be used to determine an uplink transmit power of first message (e.g., Msg 1 1311) and/or third message (e.g., Msg 3 1313). The one or more RACH parameters may indicate a reference power for a preamble transmission (e.g., a received target power and/or an initial power of the preamble transmission). There may be one or more power offsets indicated by the one or more RACH parameters. The one or more RACH parameters may indicate: a power ramping step; a power offset between SSB and CSI-RS; a power offset between transmissions of the first message (e.g., Msg 1 1311) and the third message (e.g., Msg 3 1313); and/or a power offset value between preamble groups. The one or more RACH parameters may indicate one or more thresholds, for example, based on which the wireless device may determine at least one reference signal (e.g., an SSB and/or CSI-RS) and/or an uplink carrier (e.g., a normal uplink (NUL) carrier and/or a supplemental uplink (SUL) carrier).

The first message (e.g., Msg 1 1311) may comprise one or more preamble transmissions (e.g., a preamble transmission and one or more preamble retransmissions). An RRC message may be used to configure one or more preamble groups (e.g., group A and/or group B). A preamble group may comprise one or more preambles. The wireless device may determine the preamble group, for example, based on a pathloss measurement and/or a size of the third message (e.g., Msg 3 1313). The wireless device may measure an RSRP of one or more reference signals (e.g., SSBs and/or CSI-RSs) and determine at least one reference signal having an RSRP above an RSRP threshold (e.g., rsrp-ThresholdSSB and/or rsrp-ThresholdCSl-RS). The wireless device may select at least one preamble associated with the one or more reference signals and/or a selected preamble group, for example, if the association between the one or more preambles and the at least one reference signal is configured by an RRC message.

The wireless device may determine the preamble, for example, based on the one or more RACH parameters provided/configured/comprised in the configuration message 1310. The wireless device may determine the preamble, for example, based on a pathloss measurement, an RSRP measurement, and/or a size of the third message (e.g., Msg 3 1313). The one or more RACH parameters may indicate: a preamble format; a maximum quantity/number of preamble transmissions; and/or one or more thresholds for determining one or more preamble groups (e.g., group A and group B). A base station may use the one or more RACH parameters to configure the wireless device with an association between one or more preambles and one or more reference signals (e.g., SSBs and/or CSI-RSs). The wireless device may determine the preamble to be comprised in first message (e.g., Msg 1 1311), for example, based on the association if the association is configured. The first message (e.g., Msg 1 1311) may be sent/transmitted to the base station via one or more PRACH occasions. The wireless device may use one or more reference signals (e.g., SSBs and/or CSI-RSs) for selection of the preamble and for determining of the PRACH occasion. One or more RACH parameters (e.g., ra-ssb-OccasionMskIndex and/or ra-OccasionList) may indicate an association between the PRACH occasions and the one or more reference signals.

The wireless device may perform a preamble retransmission, for example, if no response is received after (e.g., based on or in response to) a preamble transmission (e.g., for a period of time, such as a monitoring window for monitoring an RAR). The wireless device may increase an uplink transmit power for the preamble retransmission. The wireless device may select an initial preamble transmit power, for example, based on a pathloss measurement and/or a target received preamble power configured by the network. The wireless device may determine to resend/retransmit a preamble and may ramp up the uplink transmit power. The wireless device may receive one or more RACH parameters (e.g., PREAMBLE_POWER_RAMPING_STEP) indicating a ramping step for the preamble retransmission. The ramping step may be an amount of incremental increase in uplink transmit power for a retransmission. The wireless device may ramp up the uplink transmit power, for example, if the wireless device determines a reference signal (e.g., SSB and/or CSI-RS) that is the same as a previous preamble transmission. The wireless device may count the quantity/number of preamble transmissions and/or retransmissions, for example, using a counter parameter (e.g., PREAMBLE_TRANSMISSION_COUNTER). The wireless device may determine that a random access procedure has been completed unsuccessfully, for example, if the quantity/number of preamble transmissions exceeds a threshold configured by the one or more RACH parameters (e.g., preambleTransMax) without receiving a successful response (e.g., an RAR).

The second message (e.g., Msg 2 1312) (e.g., received by the wireless device) may comprise an RAR. The second message (e.g., Msg 2 1312) may comprise multiple RARs corresponding to multiple wireless devices. The second message (e.g., Msg 2 1312) may be received, for example, after (e.g., based on or in response to) the sending/transmitting of the first message (e.g., Msg 1 1311). The second message (e.g., Msg 2 1312) may be scheduled on the DL-SCH and may be indicated by a PDCCH, for example, using a random access radio network temporary identifier (RA RNTI). The second message (e.g., Msg 2 1312) may indicate that the first message (e.g., Msg 1 1311) was received by the base station. The second message (e.g., Msg 2 1312) may comprise a time-alignment command that may be used by the wireless device to adjust the transmission timing of the wireless device, a scheduling grant for transmission of the third message (e.g., Msg 3 1313), and/or a Temporary Cell RNTI (TC-RNTI). The wireless device may determine/start a time window (e.g., ra-ResponseWindow) to monitor a PDCCH for the second message (e.g., Msg 2 1312), for example, after sending/transmitting the first message (e.g., Msg 1 1311) (e.g., a preamble). The wireless device may determine the start time of the time window, for example, based on a PRACH occasion that the wireless device uses to send/transmit the first message (e.g., Msg 1 1311) (e.g., the preamble). The wireless device may start the time window one or more symbols after the last symbol of the first message (e.g., Msg 1 1311) comprising the preamble (e.g., the symbol in which the first message (e.g., Msg 1 1311) comprising the preamble transmission was completed or at a first PDCCH occasion from an end of a preamble transmission). The one or more symbols may be determined based on a numerology. The PDCCH may be mapped in a common search space (e.g., a Type 1-PDCCH common search space) configured by an RRC message. The wireless device may identify/determine the RAR, for example, based on an RNTI. Radio network temporary identifiers (RNTIs) may be used depending on one or more events initiating/starting the random access procedure. The wireless device may use a RA-RNTI, for example, for one or more communications associated with random access or any other purpose. The RA-RNTI may be associated with PRACH occasions in which the wireless device sends/transmits a preamble. The wireless device may determine the RA-RNTI, for example, based on at least one of: an OFDM symbol index; a slot index; a frequency domain index; and/or a UL carrier indicator of the PRACH occasions. An example RA-RNTI may be determined as follows:

RA-RNTI=1+s_id+14×t_id+14×8×f_id+14×80×8×ul_carrier_id

where s_id may be an index of a first OFDM symbol of the PRACH occasion (e.g., 0≤s_id <14), t_id may be an index of a first slot of the PRACH occasion in a system frame (e.g., 0≤t_id<80), f_id may be an index of the PRACH occasion in the frequency domain (e.g., 0≤f_id<8), and ul_carrier_id may be a UL carrier used for a preamble transmission (e.g., 0 for an NUL carrier, and 1 for an SUL carrier).

The wireless device may send/transmit the third message (e.g., Msg 3 1313), for example, after (e.g., based on or in response to) a successful reception of the second message (e.g., Msg 2 1312) (e.g., using resources identified in the Msg 2 1312). The third message (e.g., Msg 3 1313) may be used, for example, for contention resolution in the contention-based random access procedure. A plurality of wireless devices may send/transmit the same preamble to a base station, and the base station may send/transmit an RAR that corresponds to a wireless device. Collisions may occur, for example, if the plurality of wireless device interpret the RAR as corresponding to themselves. Contention resolution (e.g., using the third message (e.g., Msg 3 1313) and the fourth message (e.g., Msg 4 1314)) may be used to increase the likelihood that the wireless device does not incorrectly use an identity of another the wireless device. The wireless device may comprise a device identifier in the third message (e.g., Msg 3 1313) (e.g., a C-RNTI if assigned, a TC RNTI comprised in the second message (e.g., Msg 2 1312), and/or any other suitable identifier), for example, to perform contention resolution.

The fourth message (e.g., Msg 4 1314) may be received, for example, after (e.g., based on or in response to) the sending/transmitting of the third message (e.g., Msg 3 1313). The base station may address the wireless on the PDCCH (e.g., the base station may send the PDCCH to the wireless device) using a C-RNTI, for example, If the C-RNTI was included in the third message (e.g., Msg 3 1313). The random access procedure may be determined to be successfully completed, for example, if the unique C RNTI of the wireless device is detected on the PDCCH (e.g., the PDCCH is scrambled by the C-RNTI). fourth message (e.g., Msg 4 1314) may be received using a DL-SCH associated with a TC RNTI, for example, if the TC RNTI is comprised in the third message (e.g., Msg 3 1313) (e.g., if the wireless device is in an RRC idle (e.g., an RRC_IDLE) state or not otherwise connected to the base station). The wireless device may determine that the contention resolution is successful and/or the wireless device may determine that the random access procedure is successfully completed, for example, if a MAC PDU is successfully decoded and a MAC PDU comprises the wireless device contention resolution identity MAC CE that matches or otherwise corresponds with the CCCH SDU sent/transmitted in third message (e.g., Msg 3 1313).

The wireless device may be configured with an SUL carrier and/or an NUL carrier. An initial access (e.g., random access) may be supported via an uplink carrier. A base station may configure the wireless device with multiple RACH configurations (e.g., two separate RACH configurations comprising: one for an SUL carrier and the other for an NUL carrier). For random access in a cell configured with an SUL carrier, the network may indicate which carrier to use (NUL or SUL). The wireless device may determine to use the SUL carrier, for example, if a measured quality of one or more reference signals (e.g., one or more reference signals associated with the NUL carrier) is lower than a broadcast threshold. Uplink transmissions of the random access procedure (e.g., the first message (e.g., Msg 1 1311) and/or the third message (e.g., Msg 3 1313)) may remain on, or may be performed via, the selected carrier. The wireless device may switch an uplink carrier during the random access procedure (e.g., between the Msg 1 1311 and the Msg 3 1313). The wireless device may determine and/or switch an uplink carrier for the first message (e.g., Msg 1 1311) and/or the third message (e.g., Msg 3 1313), for example, based on a channel clear assessment (e.g., a listen-before-talk).

FIG. 13B shows a two-step random access procedure. The two-step random access procedure may comprise a two-step contention-free random access procedure. Similar to the four-step contention-based random access procedure, a base station may, prior to initiation of the procedure, send/transmit a configuration message 1320 to the wireless device. The configuration message 1320 may be analogous in some respects to the configuration message 1310. The procedure shown in FIG. 13B may comprise transmissions of two messages: a first message (e.g., Msg 1 1321) and a second message (e.g., Msg 2 1322). The first message (e.g., Msg 1 1321) and the second message (e.g., Msg 2 1322) may be analogous in some respects to the first message (e.g., Msg 1 1311) and a second message (e.g., Msg 2 1312), respectively. The two-step contention-free random access procedure may not comprise messages analogous to the third message (e.g., Msg 3 1313) and/or the fourth message (e.g., Msg 4 1314).

The two-step (e.g., contention-free) random access procedure may be configured/initiated for a beam failure recovery, other SI request, an SCell addition, and/or a handover. A base station may indicate, or assign to, the wireless device a preamble to be used for the first message (e.g., Msg 1 1321). The wireless device may receive, from the base station via a PDCCH and/or an RRC, an indication of the preamble (e.g., ra-PreambleIndex).

The wireless device may start a time window (e.g., ra-ResponseWindow) to monitor a PDCCH for the RAR, for example, after (e.g., based on or in response to) sending/transmitting the preamble. The base station may configure the wireless device with one or more beam failure recovery parameters, such as a separate time window and/or a separate PDCCH in a search space indicated by an RRC message (e.g., recoverySearchSpaceId). The base station may configure the one or more beam failure recovery parameters, for example, in association with a beam failure recovery request. The separate time window for monitoring the PDCCH and/or an RAR may be configured to start after sending/transmitting a beam failure recovery request (e.g., the window may start any quantity of symbols and/or slots after transmitting the beam failure recovery request). The wireless device may monitor for a PDCCH transmission addressed to a Cell RNTI (C-RNTI) on the search space. During the two-step (e.g., contention-free) random access procedure, the wireless device may determine that a random access procedure is successful, for example, after (e.g., based on or in response to) transmitting first message (e.g., Msg 1 1321) and receiving a corresponding second message (e.g., Msg 2 1322). The wireless device may determine that a random access procedure has successfully been completed, for example, if a PDCCH transmission is addressed to a corresponding C-RNTI. The wireless device may determine that a random access procedure has successfully been completed, for example, if the wireless device receives an RAR comprising a preamble identifier corresponding to a preamble sent/transmitted by the wireless device and/or the RAR comprises a MAC sub-PDU with the preamble identifier. The wireless device may determine the response as an indication of an acknowledgement for an SI request.

FIG. 13C shows an example two-step random access procedure. Similar to the random access procedures shown in FIGS. 13A and 13B, a base station may, prior to initiation of the procedure, send/transmit a configuration message 1330 to the wireless device. The configuration message 1330 may be analogous in some respects to the configuration message 1310 and/or the configuration message 1320. The procedure shown in FIG. 13C may comprise transmissions of multiple messages (e.g., two messages comprising: a first message (e.g., Msg A 1331) and a second message (e.g., Msg B 1332)).

Msg A 1320 may be sent/transmitted in an uplink transmission by the wireless device. Msg A 1320 may comprise one or more transmissions of a preamble 1341 and/or one or more transmissions of a transport block 1342. The transport block 1342 may comprise contents that are similar and/or equivalent to the contents of the third message (e.g., Msg 3 1313) (e.g., shown in FIG. 13A). The transport block 1342 may comprise UCI (e.g., an SR, a HARQ ACK/NACK, and/or the like). The wireless device may receive the second message (e.g., Msg B 1332), for example, after (e.g., based on or in response to) sending/transmitting the first message (e.g., Msg A 1331). The second message (e.g., Msg B 1332) may comprise contents that are similar and/or equivalent to the contents of the second message (e.g., Msg 2 1312) (e.g., an RAR shown in FIG. 13A), the contents of the second message (e.g., Msg 2 1322) (e.g., an RAR shown in FIG. 13B) and/or the fourth message (e.g., Msg 4 1314) (e.g., shown in FIG. 13A).

The wireless device may start/initiate the two-step random access procedure (e.g., the two-step random access procedure shown in FIG. 13C) for a licensed spectrum and/or an unlicensed spectrum. The wireless device may determine, based on one or more factors, whether to start/initiate the two-step random access procedure. The one or more factors may comprise at least one of: a radio access technology in use (e.g., LTE, NR, and/or the like); whether the wireless device has a valid TA or not; a cell size; the RRC state of the wireless device; a type of spectrum (e.g., licensed vs. unlicensed); and/or any other suitable factors.

The wireless device may determine, based on two-step RACH parameters comprised in the configuration message 1330, a radio resource and/or an uplink transmit power for the preamble 1341 and/or the transport block 1342 (e.g., comprised in the first message (e.g., Msg A 1331)). The RACH parameters may indicate an MCS, a time-frequency resource, and/or a power control for the preamble 1341 and/or the transport block 1342. A time-frequency resource for transmission of the preamble 1341 (e.g., a PRACH) and a time-frequency resource for transmission of the transport block 1342 (e.g., a PUSCH) may be multiplexed using FDM, TDM, and/or CDM. The RACH parameters may enable the wireless device to determine a reception timing and a downlink channel for monitoring for and/or receiving second message (e.g., Msg B 1332).

The transport block 1342 may comprise data (e.g., delay-sensitive data), an identifier of the wireless device, security information, and/or device information (e.g., an International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI)). The base station may send/transmit the second message (e.g., Msg B 1332) as a response to the first message (e.g., Msg A 1331). The second message (e.g., Msg B 1332) may comprise at least one of: a preamble identifier; a timing advance command; a power control command; an uplink grant (e.g., a radio resource assignment and/or an MCS); a wireless device identifier (e.g., a UE identifier for contention resolution); and/or an RNTI (e.g., a C-RNTI or a TC-RNTI). The wireless device may determine that the two-step random access procedure is successfully completed, for example, if a preamble identifier in the second message (e.g., Msg B 1332) corresponds to, or is matched to, a preamble sent/transmitted by the wireless device and/or the identifier of the wireless device in second message (e.g., Msg B 1332) corresponds to, or is matched to, the identifier of the wireless device in the first message (e.g., Msg A 1331) (e.g., the transport block 1342).

A wireless device and a base station may exchange control signaling (e.g., control information). The control signaling may be referred to as L1/L2 control signaling and may originate from the PHY layer (e.g., layer 1) and/or the MAC layer (e.g., layer 2) of the wireless device or the base station. The control signaling may comprise downlink control signaling sent/transmitted from the base station to the wireless device and/or uplink control signaling sent/transmitted from the wireless device to the base station.

The downlink control signaling may comprise at least one of: a downlink scheduling assignment; an uplink scheduling grant indicating uplink radio resources and/or a transport format; slot format information; a preemption indication; a power control command; and/or any other suitable signaling. The wireless device may receive the downlink control signaling in a payload sent/transmitted by the base station via a PDCCH. The payload sent/transmitted via the PDCCH may be referred to as downlink control information (DCI). The PDCCH may be a group common PDCCH (GC-PDCCH) that is common to a group of wireless devices. The GC-PDCCH may be scrambled by a group common RNTI.

A base station may attach one or more cyclic redundancy check (CRC) parity bits to DCI, for example, in order to facilitate detection of transmission errors. The base station may scramble the CRC parity bits with an identifier of a wireless device (or an identifier of a group of wireless devices), for example, if the DCI is intended for the wireless device (or the group of the wireless devices). Scrambling the CRC parity bits with the identifier may comprise Modulo-2 addition (or an exclusive-OR operation) of the identifier value and the CRC parity bits. The identifier may comprise a 16-bit value of an RNTI.

DCIs may be used for different purposes. A purpose may be indicated by the type of an RNTI used to scramble the CRC parity bits. DCI having CRC parity bits scrambled with a paging RNTI (P-RNTI) may indicate paging information and/or a system information change notification. The P-RNTI may be predefined as “1-1-FE” in hexadecimal. DCI having CRC parity bits scrambled with a system information RNTI (SI-RNTI) may indicate a broadcast transmission of the system information. The SI-RNTI may be predefined as “FFFF” in hexadecimal. DCI having CRC parity bits scrambled with a random access RNTI (RA-RNTI) may indicate a random access response (RAR). DCI having CRC parity bits scrambled with a cell RNTI (C-RNTI) may indicate a dynamically scheduled unicast transmission and/or a triggering of PDCCH-ordered random access. DCI having CRC parity bits scrambled with a temporary cell RNTI (TC-RNTI) may indicate a contention resolution (e.g., a Msg 3 analogous to the Msg 3 1313 shown in FIG. 13A). Other RNTIs configured for a wireless device by a base station may comprise a Configured Scheduling RNTI (CS RNTI), a Transmit Power Control-PUCCH RNTI (TPC PUCCH-RNTI), a Transmit Power Control-PUSCH RNTI (TPC-PUSCH-RNTI), a Transmit Power Control-SRS RNTI (TPC-SRS-RNTI), an Interruption RNTI (INT-RNTI), a Slot Format Indication RNTI (SFI-RNTI), a Semi-Persistent CSI RNTI (SP-CSI-RNTI), a Modulation and Coding Scheme Cell RNTI (MCS-C RNTI), and/or the like.

A base station may send/transmit DCIs with one or more DCI formats, for example, depending on the purpose and/or content of the DCIs. DCI format 0_0 may be used for scheduling of a PUSCH in a cell. DCI format 0_0 may be a fallback DCI format (e.g., with compact DCI payloads). DCI format 0_1 may be used for scheduling of a PUSCH in a cell (e.g., with more DCI payloads than DCI format 0_0). DCI format 1_0 may be used for scheduling of a PDSCH in a cell. DCI format 1_0 may be a fallback DCI format (e.g., with compact DCI payloads). DCI format 1_1 may be used for scheduling of a PDSCH in a cell (e.g., with more DCI payloads than DCI format 1_0). DCI format 2_0 may be used for providing a slot format indication to a group of wireless devices. DCI format 2_1 may be used for informing/notifying a group of wireless devices of a physical resource block and/or an OFDM symbol where the group of wireless devices may assume no transmission is intended to the group of wireless devices. DCI format 2_2 may be used for transmission of a transmit power control (TPC) command for PUCCH or PUSCH. DCI format 2_3 may be used for transmission of a group of TPC commands for SRS transmissions by one or more wireless devices. DCI format(s) for new functions may be defined in future releases. DCI formats may have different DCI sizes, or may share the same DCI size.

The base station may process the DCI with channel coding (e.g., polar coding), rate matching, scrambling and/or QPSK modulation, for example, after scrambling the DCI with an RNTI. A base station may map the coded and modulated DCI on resource elements used and/or configured for a PDCCH. The base station may send/transmit the DCI via a PDCCH occupying a number of contiguous control channel elements (CCEs), for example, based on a payload size of the DCI and/or a coverage of the base station. The number of the contiguous CCEs (referred to as aggregation level) may be 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, and/or any other suitable number. A CCE may comprise a number (e.g., 6) of resource-element groups (REGs). A REG may comprise a resource block in an OFDM symbol. The mapping of the coded and modulated DCI on the resource elements may be based on mapping of CCEs and REGs (e.g., CCE-to-REG mapping).

FIG. 14A shows an example of CORESET configurations. The CORESET configurations may be for a bandwidth part or any other frequency bands. The base station may send/transmit DCI via a PDCCH on one or more control resource sets (CORESETs). A CORESET may comprise a time-frequency resource in which the wireless device attempts/tries to decode DCI using one or more search spaces. The base station may configure a size and a location of the CORESET in the time-frequency domain. A first CORESET 1401 and a second CORESET 1402 may occur or may be set/configured at the first symbol in a slot. The first CORESET 1401 may overlap with the second CORESET 1402 in the frequency domain. A third CORESET 1403 may occur or may be set/configured at a third symbol in the slot. A fourth CORESET 1404 may occur or may be set/configured at the seventh symbol in the slot. CORESETs may have a different number of resource blocks in frequency domain.

FIG. 14B shows an example of a CCE-to-REG mapping. The CCE-to-REG mapping may be performed for DCI transmission via a CORESET and PDCCH processing. The CCE-to-REG mapping may be an interleaved mapping (e.g., for the purpose of providing frequency diversity) or a non-interleaved mapping (e.g., for the purposes of facilitating interference coordination and/or frequency-selective transmission of control channels). The base station may perform different or same CCE-to-REG mapping on different CORESETs. A CORESET may be associated with a CCE-to-REG mapping (e.g., by an RRC configuration). A CORESET may be configured with an antenna port QCL parameter. The antenna port QCL parameter may indicate QCL information of a DM-RS for a PDCCH reception via the CORESET.

The base station may send/transmit, to the wireless device, one or more RRC messages comprising configuration parameters of one or more CORESETs and one or more search space sets. The configuration parameters may indicate an association between a search space set and a CORESET. A search space set may comprise a set of PDCCH candidates formed by CCEs (e.g., at a given aggregation level). The configuration parameters may indicate at least one of: a number of PDCCH candidates to be monitored per aggregation level; a PDCCH monitoring periodicity and a PDCCH monitoring pattern; one or more DCI formats to be monitored by the wireless device; and/or whether a search space set is a common search space set or a wireless device-specific search space set (e.g., a UE-specific search space set). A set of CCEs in the common search space set may be predefined and known to the wireless device. A set of CCEs in the wireless device-specific search space set (e.g., the UE-specific search space set) may be configured, for example, based on the identity of the wireless device (e.g., C-RNTI).

As shown in FIG. 14B, the wireless device may determine a time-frequency resource for a CORESET based on one or more RRC messages. The wireless device may determine a CCE-to-REG mapping (e.g., interleaved or non-interleaved, and/or mapping parameters) for the CORESET, for example, based on configuration parameters of the CORESET. The wireless device may determine a number (e.g., at most 10) of search space sets configured on/for the CORESET, for example, based on the one or more RRC messages. The wireless device may monitor a set of PDCCH candidates according to configuration parameters of a search space set. The wireless device may monitor a set of PDCCH candidates in one or more CORESETs for detecting one or more DCIs. Monitoring may comprise decoding one or more PDCCH candidates of the set of the PDCCH candidates according to the monitored DCI formats. Monitoring may comprise decoding DCI content of one or more PDCCH candidates with possible (or configured) PDCCH locations, possible (or configured) PDCCH formats (e.g., the number of CCEs, the number of PDCCH candidates in common search spaces, and/or the number of PDCCH candidates in the wireless device-specific search spaces) and possible (or configured) DCI formats. The decoding may be referred to as blind decoding. The wireless device may determine DCI as valid for the wireless device, for example, after (e.g., based on or in response to) CRC checking (e.g., scrambled bits for CRC parity bits of the DCI matching an RNTI value). The wireless device may process information comprised in the DCI (e.g., a scheduling assignment, an uplink grant, power control, a slot format indication, a downlink preemption, and/or the like).

The wireless device may send/transmit uplink control signaling (e.g., UCI) to a base station. The uplink control signaling may comprise HARQ acknowledgements for received DL-SCH transport blocks. The wireless device may send/transmit the HARQ acknowledgements, for example, after (e.g., based on or in response to) receiving a DL-SCH transport block. Uplink control signaling may comprise CSI indicating a channel quality of a physical downlink channel The wireless device may send/transmit the CSI to the base station. The base station, based on the received CSI, may determine transmission format parameters (e.g., comprising multi-antenna and beamforming schemes) for downlink transmission(s). Uplink control signaling may comprise scheduling requests (SR). The wireless device may send/transmit an SR indicating that uplink data is available for transmission to the base station. The wireless device may send/transmit UCI (e.g., HARQ acknowledgements (HARQ-ACK), CSI report, SR, and the like) via a PUCCH or a PUSCH. The wireless device may send/transmit the uplink control signaling via a PUCCH using one of several PUCCH formats.

There may be multiple PUCCH formats (e.g., five PUCCH formats). A wireless device may determine a PUCCH format, for example, based on a size of UCI (e.g., a quantity/number of uplink symbols of UCI transmission and a number of UCI bits). PUCCH format 0 may have a length of one or two OFDM symbols and may comprise two or fewer bits. The wireless device may send/transmit UCI via a PUCCH resource, for example, using PUCCH format 0 if the transmission is over/via one or two symbols and the quantity/number of HARQ-ACK information bits with positive or negative SR (HARQ-ACK/SR bits) is one or two. PUCCH format 1 may occupy a number of OFDM symbols (e.g., between four and fourteen OFDM symbols) and may comprise two or fewer bits. The wireless device may use PUCCH format 1, for example, if the transmission is over/via four or more symbols and the number of HARQ-ACK/SR bits is one or two. PUCCH format 2 may occupy one or two OFDM symbols and may comprise more than two bits. The wireless device may use PUCCH format 2, for example, if the transmission is over/via one or two symbols and the quantity/number of UCI bits is two or more. PUCCH format 3 may occupy a number of OFDM symbols (e.g., between four and fourteen OFDM symbols) and may comprise more than two bits. The wireless device may use PUCCH format 3, for example, if the transmission is four or more symbols, the quantity/number of UCI bits is two or more, and the PUCCH resource does not comprise an orthogonal cover code (OCC). PUCCH format 4 may occupy a number of OFDM symbols (e.g., between four and fourteen OFDM symbols) and may comprise more than two bits. The wireless device may use PUCCH format 4, for example, if the transmission is four or more symbols, the quantity/number of UCI bits is two or more, and the PUCCH resource comprises an OCC.

The base station may send/transmit configuration parameters to the wireless device for a plurality of PUCCH resource sets, for example, using an RRC message. The plurality of PUCCH resource sets (e.g., up to four sets in NR, or up to any other quantity of sets in other systems) may be configured on an uplink BWP of a cell. A PUCCH resource set may be configured with a PUCCH resource set index, a plurality of PUCCH resources with a PUCCH resource being identified by a PUCCH resource identifier (e.g., pucch-Resourceid), and/or a number (e.g. a maximum number) of UCI information bits the wireless device may send/transmit using one of the plurality of PUCCH resources in the PUCCH resource set. The wireless device may select one of the plurality of PUCCH resource sets, for example, based on a total bit length of the UCI information bits (e.g., HARQ-ACK, SR, and/or CSI) if configured with a plurality of PUCCH resource sets. The wireless device may select a first PUCCH resource set having a PUCCH resource set index equal to “0,” for example, if the total bit length of UCI information bits is two or fewer. The wireless device may select a second PUCCH resource set having a PUCCH resource set index equal to “1,” for example, if the total bit length of UCI information bits is greater than two and less than or equal to a first configured value. The wireless device may select a third PUCCH resource set having a PUCCH resource set index equal to “2,” for example, if the total bit length of UCI information bits is greater than the first configured value and less than or equal to a second configured value. The wireless device may select a fourth PUCCH resource set having a PUCCH resource set index equal to “3,” for example, if the total bit length of UCI information bits is greater than the second configured value and less than or equal to a third value (e.g., 1406, 1706, or any other quantity of bits).

The wireless device may determine a PUCCH resource from the PUCCH resource set for UCI (HARQ-ACK, CSI, and/or SR) transmission, for example, after determining a PUCCH resource set from a plurality of PUCCH resource sets. The wireless device may determine the PUCCH resource, for example, based on a PUCCH resource indicator in DCI (e.g., with DCI format 1_0 or DCI for 1_1) received on/via a PDCCH. An n-bit (e.g., a three-bit) PUCCH resource indicator in the DCI may indicate one of multiple (e.g., eight) PUCCH resources in the PUCCH resource set. The wireless device may send/transmit the UCI (HARQ-ACK, CSI and/or SR) using a PUCCH resource indicated by the PUCCH resource indicator in the DCI, for example, based on the PUCCH resource indicator.

FIG. 15A shows example communications between a wireless device and a base station. A wireless device 1502 and a base station 1504 may be part of a communication network, such as the communication network 100 shown in FIG. 1A, the communication network 150 shown in FIG. 1B, or any other communication network. A communication network may comprise more than one wireless device and/or more than one base station, with substantially the same or similar configurations as those shown in FIG. 15A.

The base station 1504 may connect the wireless device 1502 to a core network (not shown) via radio communications over the air interface (or radio interface) 1506. The communication direction from the base station 1504 to the wireless device 1502 over the air interface 1506 may be referred to as the downlink. The communication direction from the wireless device 1502 to the base station 1504 over the air interface may be referred to as the uplink. Downlink transmissions may be separated from uplink transmissions, for example, using various duplex schemes (e.g., FDD, TDD, and/or some combination of the duplexing techniques).

For the downlink, data to be sent to the wireless device 1502 from the base station 1504 may be provided/transferred/sent to the processing system 1508 of the base station 1504. The data may be provided/transferred/sent to the processing system 1508 by, for example, a core network. For the uplink, data to be sent to the base station 1504 from the wireless device 1502 may be provided/transferred/sent to the processing system 1518 of the wireless device 1502. The processing system 1508 and the processing system 1518 may implement layer 3 and layer 2 OSI functionality to process the data for transmission. Layer 2 may comprise an SDAP layer, a PDCP layer, an RLC layer, and a MAC layer, for example, described with respect to FIG. 2A, FIG. 2B, FIG. 3, and FIG. 4A. Layer 3 may comprise an RRC layer, for example, described with respect to FIG. 2B.

The data to be sent to the wireless device 1502 may be provided/transferred/sent to a transmission processing system 1510 of base station 1504, for example, after being processed by the processing system 1508. The data to be sent to base station 1504 may be provided/transferred/sent to a transmission processing system 1520 of the wireless device 1502, for example, after being processed by the processing system 1518. The transmission processing system 1510 and the transmission processing system 1520 may implement layer 1 OSI functionality. Layer 1 may comprise a PHY layer, for example, described with respect to FIG. 2A, FIG. 2B, FIG. 3, and FIG. 4A. For sending/transmission processing, the PHY layer may perform, for example, forward error correction coding of transport channels, interleaving, rate matching, mapping of transport channels to physical channels, modulation of physical channel, multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) or multi-antenna processing, and/or the like.

A reception processing system 1512 of the base station 1504 may receive the uplink transmission from the wireless device 1502. The reception processing system 1512 of the base station 1504 may comprise one or more TRPs. A reception processing system 1522 of the wireless device 1502 may receive the downlink transmission from the base station 1504. The reception processing system 1522 of the wireless device 1502 may comprise one or more antenna panels. The reception processing system 1512 and the reception processing system 1522 may implement layer 1 OSI functionality. Layer 1 may include a PHY layer, for example, described with respect to FIG. 2A, FIG. 2B, FIG. 3, and FIG. 4A. For receive processing, the PHY layer may perform, for example, error detection, forward error correction decoding, deinterleaving, demapping of transport channels to physical channels, demodulation of physical channels, MIMO or multi-antenna processing, and/or the like.

The base station 1504 may comprise multiple antennas (e.g., multiple antenna panels, multiple TRPs, etc.). The wireless device 1502 may comprise multiple antennas (e.g., multiple antenna panels, etc.). The multiple antennas may be used to perform one or more MIMO or multi-antenna techniques, such as spatial multiplexing (e.g., single-user MIMO or multi-user MIMO), transmit/receive diversity, and/or beamforming. The wireless device 1502 and/or the base station 1504 may have a single antenna.

The processing system 1508 and the processing system 1518 may be associated with a memory 1514 and a memory 1524, respectively. Memory 1514 and memory 1524 (e.g., one or more non-transitory computer readable mediums) may store computer program instructions or code that may be executed by the processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518, respectively, to carry out one or more of the functionalities (e.g., one or more functionalities described herein and other functionalities of general computers, processors, memories, and/or other peripherals). The transmission processing system 1510 and/or the reception processing system 1512 may be coupled to the memory 1514 and/or another memory (e.g., one or more non-transitory computer readable mediums) storing computer program instructions or code that may be executed to carry out one or more of their respective functionalities. The transmission processing system 1520 and/or the reception processing system 1522 may be coupled to the memory 1524 and/or another memory (e.g., one or more non-transitory computer readable mediums) storing computer program instructions or code that may be executed to carry out one or more of their respective functionalities.

The processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 may comprise one or more controllers and/or one or more processors. The one or more controllers and/or one or more processors may comprise, for example, a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), a microcontroller, an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (FPGA) and/or other programmable logic device, discrete gate and/or transistor logic, discrete hardware components, an on-board unit, or any combination thereof. The processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 may perform at least one of signal coding/processing, data processing, power control, input/output processing, and/or any other functionality that may enable the wireless device 1502 and/or the base station 1504 to operate in a wireless environment.

The processing system 1508 may be connected to one or more peripherals 1516. The processing system 1518 may be connected to one or more peripherals 1526. The one or more peripherals 1516 and the one or more peripherals 1526 may comprise software and/or hardware that provide features and/or functionalities, for example, a speaker, a microphone, a keypad, a display, a touchpad, a power source, a satellite transceiver, a universal serial bus (USB) port, a hands-free headset, a frequency modulated (FM) radio unit, a media player, an Internet browser, an electronic control unit (e.g., for a motor vehicle), and/or one or more sensors (e.g., an accelerometer, a gyroscope, a temperature sensor, a radar sensor, a lidar sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a light sensor, a camera, and/or the like). The processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 may receive input data (e.g., user input data) from, and/or provide output data (e.g., user output data) to, the one or more peripherals 1516 and/or the one or more peripherals 1526. The processing system 1518 in the wireless device 1502 may receive power from a power source and/or may be configured to distribute the power to the other components in the wireless device 1502. The power source may comprise one or more sources of power, for example, a battery, a solar cell, a fuel cell, or any combination thereof. The processing system 1508 may be connected to a Global Positioning System (GPS) chipset 1517. The processing system 1518 may be connected to a Global Positioning System (GPS) chipset 1527. The GPS chipset 1517 and the GPS chipset 1527 may be configured to determine and provide geographic location information of the wireless device 1502 and the base station 1504, respectively.

FIG. 15B shows example elements of a computing device that may be used to implement any of the various devices described herein, including, for example, the base station 160A, 160B, 162A, 162B, 220, and/or 1504, the wireless device 106, 156A, 156B, 210, and/or 1502, or any other base station, wireless device, AMF, UPF, network device, or computing device described herein. The computing device 1530 may include one or more processors 1531, which may execute instructions stored in the random-access memory (RAM) 1533, the removable media 1534 (such as a Universal Serial Bus (USB) drive, compact disk (CD) or digital versatile disk (DVD), or floppy disk drive), or any other desired storage medium. Instructions may also be stored in an attached (or internal) hard drive 1535. The computing device 1530 may also include a security processor (not shown), which may execute instructions of one or more computer programs to monitor the processes executing on the processor 1531 and any process that requests access to any hardware and/or software components of the computing device 1530 (e.g., ROM 1532, RAM 1533, the removable media 1534, the hard drive 1535, the device controller 1537, a network interface 1539, a GPS 1541, a Bluetooth interface 1542, a WiFi interface 1543, etc.). The computing device 1530 may include one or more output devices, such as the display 1536 (e.g., a screen, a display device, a monitor, a television, etc.), and may include one or more output device controllers 1537, such as a video processor. There may also be one or more user input devices 1538, such as a remote control, keyboard, mouse, touch screen, microphone, etc. The computing device 1530 may also include one or more network interfaces, such as a network interface 1539, which may be a wired interface, a wireless interface, or a combination of the two. The network interface 1539 may provide an interface for the computing device 1530 to communicate with a network 1540 (e.g., a RAN, or any other network). The network interface 1539 may include a modem (e.g., a cable modem), and the external network 1540 may include communication links, an external network, an in-home network, a provider's wireless, coaxial, fiber, or hybrid fiber/coaxial distribution system (e.g., a DOCSIS network), or any other desired network. Additionally, the computing device 1530 may include a location-detecting device, such as a global positioning system (GPS) microprocessor 1541, which may be configured to receive and process global positioning signals and determine, with possible assistance from an external server and antenna, a geographic position of the computing device 1530.

The example in FIG. 15B may be a hardware configuration, although the components shown may be implemented as software as well. Modifications may be made to add, remove, combine, divide, etc. components of the computing device 1530 as desired. Additionally, the components may be implemented using basic computing devices and components, and the same components (e.g., processor 1531, ROM storage 1532, display 1536, etc.) may be used to implement any of the other computing devices and components described herein. For example, the various components described herein may be implemented using computing devices having components such as a processor executing computer-executable instructions stored on a computer-readable medium, as shown in FIG. 15B. Some or all of the entities described herein may be software based, and may co-exist in a common physical platform (e.g., a requesting entity may be a separate software process and program from a dependent entity, both of which may be executed as software on a common computing device).

FIG. 16A shows an example structure for uplink transmission. Processing of a baseband signal representing a physical uplink shared channel may comprise/perform one or more functions. The one or more functions may comprise at least one of: scrambling; modulation of scrambled bits to generate complex-valued symbols; mapping of the complex-valued modulation symbols onto one or several transmission layers; transform precoding to generate complex-valued symbols; precoding of the complex-valued symbols; mapping of precoded complex-valued symbols to resource elements; generation of complex-valued time-domain Single Carrier-Frequency Division Multiple Access (SC-FDMA), CP-OFDM signal for an antenna port, or any other signals; and/or the like. An SC-FDMA signal for uplink transmission may be generated, for example, if transform precoding is enabled. A CP-OFDM signal for uplink transmission may be generated, for example, if transform precoding is not enabled (e.g., as shown in FIG. 16A). These functions are examples and other mechanisms for uplink transmission may be implemented.

FIG. 16B shows an example structure for modulation and up-conversion of a baseband signal to a carrier frequency. The baseband signal may be a complex-valued SC-FDMA, CP-OFDM baseband signal (or any other baseband signals) for an antenna port and/or a complex-valued Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH) baseband signal. Filtering may be performed/employed, for example, prior to transmission.

FIG. 16C shows an example structure for downlink transmissions. Processing of a baseband signal representing a physical downlink channel may comprise/perform one or more functions. The one or more functions may comprise: scrambling of coded bits in a codeword to be sent/transmitted on/via a physical channel; modulation of scrambled bits to generate complex-valued modulation symbols; mapping of the complex-valued modulation symbols onto one or several transmission layers; precoding of the complex-valued modulation symbols on a layer for transmission on the antenna ports; mapping of complex-valued modulation symbols for an antenna port to resource elements; generation of complex-valued time-domain OFDM signal for an antenna port; and/or the like. These functions are examples and other mechanisms for downlink transmission may be implemented.

FIG. 16D shows an example structure for modulation and up-conversion of a baseband signal to a carrier frequency. The baseband signal may be a complex-valued OFDM baseband signal for an antenna port or any other signal. Filtering may be performed/employed, for example, prior to transmission.

A wireless device may receive, from a base station, one or more messages (e.g. RRC messages) comprising configuration parameters of a plurality of cells (e.g., a primary cell, one or more secondary cells). The wireless device may communicate with at least one base station (e.g., two or more base stations in dual-connectivity) via the plurality of cells. The one or more messages (e.g. as a part of the configuration parameters) may comprise parameters of PHY, MAC, RLC, PCDP, SDAP, RRC layers for configuring the wireless device. The configuration parameters may comprise parameters for configuring PHY and MAC layer channels, bearers, etc. The configuration parameters may comprise parameters indicating values of timers for PHY, MAC, RLC, PCDP, SDAP, RRC layers, and/or communication channels.

A timer may begin running, for example, if it is started, and continue running until it is stopped or until it expires. A timer may be started, for example, if it is not running or restarted if it is running. A timer may be associated with a value (e.g., the timer may be started or restarted from a value or may be started from zero and expire if it reaches the value). The duration of a timer may not be updated, for example, until the timer is stopped or expires (e.g., due to BWP switching). A timer may be used to measure a time period/window for a process. With respect to an implementation and/or procedure related to one or more timers or other parameters, it will be understood that there may be multiple ways to implement the one or more timers or other parameters. One or more of the multiple ways to implement a timer may be used to measure a time period/window for the procedure. A random access response window timer may be used for measuring a window of time for receiving a random access response. The time difference between two time stamps may be used, for example, instead of starting a random access response window timer and determine the expiration of the timer. A process for measuring a time window may be restarted, for example, if a timer is restarted. Other example implementations may be configured/provided to restart a measurement of a time window.

A wireless device may communicate via multiple TRPs. The wireless device may use transmission repetition to communicate via the multiple TRPs. For example, the wireless device may use PUSCH repetition to send repetitions of a transport block via a PUSCH. The wireless device may use multiple different spatial domain transmission filters/beams for spatial diversity in transmission repetition. The wireless device may send a transport block and/or first repetition(s) of the transport block using a first spatial domain transmission filter/beam to a first TRP, and second repetition(s) of the transport block using a second spatial domain transmission filter/beam to a second TRP. Using multiple different spatial domain transmission filters may increase reliability and robustness of uplink transmissions.

A wireless device may determine a spatial domain transmission filter based on base station configuration. The base station may configure (e.g., for a configured uplink grant) a single SRI field. The SRI field may indicate an SRS resource in an SRS resource set. The wireless device may determine a single spatial domain transmission filter/beam based on a spatial relation activated for the SRS resource. The wireless device may send a transport block (e.g., repetitions of the transport block) using the single spatial domain transmission filter/beam. Transmission repetition for communicating via multiple TRPs (e.g., with spatial diversity) cannot be supported if only single spatial domain transmission filter may be configured by the base station.

Various examples herein may facilitate configuration and use of multiple beams for communicating via multiple TRPs. The wireless device may send a transport block (e.g., repetitions of the transport block) via multiple different beams (e.g., spatial domain transmission filters). A base station may indicate multiple SRS resources for the wireless device. The wireless device may determine multiple spatial domain transmission filters based on the multiple SRS resources.

The base station may send (e.g., in a message associated with a configured uplink grant, or DCI) a message comprising a plurality of SRI fields (e.g., a first SRI field and a second SRI field). The plurality of SRI fields may indicate a plurality of SRS resources. Each field of the plurality of SRI fields may indicate a corresponding SRS resource. For example, the first SRI field may indicate a first SRS resource and the second SRI field may indicate a second SRS resource. The first SRS resource and the second SRS resource may be in different SRS resource sets or in a same resource set. The base station may send (e.g., in a message associated with a configured uplink grant, or DCI) a message comprising a single SRI field. The single SRI field may indicate a plurality of SRS resources. For example, the SRI field may indicate a first SRS resource and a second SRS resource. The wireless device may determine a plurality of spatial domain transmission filters/beams based on the plurality of SRS resources. The wireless device may send the transport block (e.g., repetitions of the transport block) via the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters.

Using multiple SRI fields may provide flexibility with relation to transmission power control for repetition transmission. For example, each SRI field, of the multiple SRI fields, may indicate a corresponding SRS resource in a corresponding SRS resource set. Each of the SRS resource sets may be associated with a corresponding power control parameter set. The wireless device may determine transmission powers for the transmission repetition based on the power control parameter sets. Using multiple power control parameter sets (e.g., as facilitated by the provision of multiple SRI fields) may enable the base station to more flexibly control transmission powers for repetitions of an uplink transmission. For example, different repetitions may be configured with different transmission powers.

A wireless device may receive (e.g., from a base station) one or more messages comprising one or more configuration parameters. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate a plurality of uplink resources (e.g., SRS resources) for an active uplink BWP of a cell.

The wireless device may receive DCI. The DCI may schedule a message (e.g., a transport block). The DCI may indicate an uplink resource among the plurality of uplink resources. The one or more configuration parameters may or may not indicate a spatial relation (e.g., a transmitting beam) for the uplink resource. The wireless device may determine a default TCI state for transmission of the transport block, for example, based on the one or more configuration parameters not indicating the spatial relation for the uplink resource.

The wireless device may determine a spatial domain transmission filter (e.g., a transmitting beam) based on the default TCI state. The wireless device may send (e.g., transmit) the transport block with/using the spatial domain transmission filter. The wireless device may repeat transmission of the transport block. The wireless device may use the (same) spatial domain transmission filter for transmission repetition of the transport block via (e.g., across or over) multiple transmission occasions. The wireless device may repeat the transmission of the transport block if indicated in the DCI and/or the one or more configuration parameters.

The wireless device may determine a transmission power (or a downlink pathloss estimate of the transmission power) based on the default TCI state. The wireless device may transmit the transport block with/using the transmission power. The wireless device may repeat (e.g., if indicated by the DCI or the one or more configuration parameters) transmission, via multiple transmission occasions (e.g., time slots, symbols), of the transport block with/using the transmission power.

The wireless device may be served by (e.g., transmit to and/or receive from) a plurality of TRPs. The plurality of TRPs may comprise a first TRP and a second TRP. The wireless device may receive DCI scheduling a transport block. The wireless device may repeat transmission of the transport block, for example, if indicated by the DCI or the one or more configuration parameters. The wireless device may send (e.g., transmit), to the first TRP, the transport block via first transmission occasion(s). The wireless device may transmit, to the second TRP, the transport block via second transmission occasion(s). Transmission of the transport block via multiple transmission occasions and to multiple TRPs may increase reliability of the transport block and probability of a successful reception/decoding of the transport block (e.g., at a base station).

A base station may schedule uplink transmission via a plurality of TRPs. For example, DCI, from the base station, may indicate at least two uplink resources of the plurality of uplink resources. Each uplink resource of the at least two uplink resources may be associated with a respective TRP of the plurality of TRPs. The one or more configuration parameters may or may not indicate spatial relation(s) for the at least two uplink resources. The wireless device may select/determine a single default TCI state for transmission of the transport block, for example, based on the one or more configuration parameters not indicating the spatial relation for the at least two uplink resources. Selecting the single default TCI state, for repetition of the transport block, may not be efficient, for example, if the wireless device is served by the plurality of TRPs. The wireless device may not exploit spatial diversity if the wireless device selects a single default TCI state. The base station may not receive/decode a transport block successfully, for example, if a spatial domain transmission filter determined based on the single default TCI state fails and/or results in reduced reception quality (e.g., because of obstacles, movement, rotation, velocity of the wireless device, etc.). Failure to receive/decode a transport block may increase error rate, reduce data rate, result in coverage loss, increase retransmissions (which may lead to increased power consumption at the wireless device and the base station).

Using multiple beams (e.g., corresponding to different directions, different widths, etc.) for transmission to multiple TRPs may improve performance. Various examples herein improve/enhance default TCI state selection (e.g., beam selection), for example, if a wireless device is served by a plurality of TRPs. The wireless device may conditionally select multiple default TCI states. The wireless device may determine whether to select a single default TCI state or at least two default TCI states. One or more configuration parameters (e.g., sent by a base station) may comprise an enabling parameter indicating whether to select a single default TCI state or at least two default TCI states. The wireless device may determine to select at least two default TCI states, for example, based on at least one TCI codepoint indicating two activated TCI states. The wireless device may determine to select a single default TCI state, for example, based on no TCI codepoint indicating two activated TCI states. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate a repetition scheme (e.g., based on TDM, FDM, spatial division multiplexing (SDM), CDM, etc.). The wireless device may determine to select at least two default TCI states based on the one or more configuration parameters indicating the repetition scheme. The wireless device may determine to select at least two default TCI states based on the DCI (e.g., TCI field of the DCI) indicating at least two uplink resources.

The wireless device may determine at least two default TCI states. The wireless device may determine the at least two default TCI states based on a rule. The wireless device may determine the at least two default TCI states based on a lowest TCI codepoint indicating two activated TCI states. The wireless device may determine the at least two default TCI states based on two activated TCI states of two CORESETs with the lowest two CORESET indicators/indexes in the active downlink BWP. The wireless device may determine a first default TCI state of the at least two default TCI states based on a TCI state of a CORESET with the lowest CORESET indicator/index in the active downlink BWP. The wireless device may determine a second default TCI state of at least two default TCI states based on a second TCI state of a lowest TCI codepoint indicating two activated TCI states.

The wireless device may determine at least two default spatial domain transmission filters. The wireless device may determine the at least two default spatial domain transmission filters, for example, based on the at least two default TCI states. The wireless device may send/transmit the transport block using/with the two default spatial domain transmission filters. The wireless device may repeat transmission of a message (e.g., a transport block) across/over a plurality of resources (e.g., time slots, mini-slots, symbols, etc.) using/with the two default spatial domain transmission filters. The repeating transmission of the transport block across/over the plurality of resources using/with the at least two default spatial domain transmission filters may increase robustness. For example, a first default spatial domain transmission filter of the at least two default spatial domain transmission filters may work even if a second default spatial domain transmission filter of the at least two default spatial domain transmission filters, or vice versa. The redundancy enabled by the use of the at least two default spatial domain transmission filters may decrease error rate, increase data rate, and/or reduce coverage loss. Reduced error rate and/or coverage loss may reduce retransmissions, thereby enabling reduced power consumption.

In at least some wireless communications (e.g., using 3GPP Release 16, earlier/later 3GPP releases or generations, LTE access technology, and/or other access technology), a wireless device may apply/use a default TCI state based on one or more conditions. The wireless device may apply the default TCI state, for example, if a wireless device receives DCI indicating an SRS resource, and if the SRS resource is not configured (e.g., provided or activated) with a spatial relation. The default TCI state may correspond to a CORESET with the lowest CORESET indicator/index. The wireless device may use the default TCI state to determine a default transmitting beam, and/or a default pathloss reference signal for transmission of a message (e.g., transport block) scheduled by the DCI.

In at least some wireless communications (e.g., using 3GPP Release 17, earlier/later 3GPP releases or generations, LTE access technology, and/or other access technology), a wireless device may support transmission repetition (e.g., PUSCH transmission repetition) to multiple TRPs. The wireless device may repeat transmission of a transport block using multiple different transmitting beams and powers. Selection of a single default TCI state (e.g., TCI state of the CORESET with the lowest CORESET indicator/index), for example, if an SRS resource indicated by the DCI is not configured with a spatial relation may not support multi-TRP transmission repetition as multiple different transmitting beams/powers are required. The wireless device may be unable to advantageously utilize spatial diversity.

A wireless device may determine multiple default TCI states based on one or more considerations. The wireless device may determine multiple default TCI states for transmission repetition (e.g., of a transport block) scheduled by DCI, for example, if the DCI indicates an SRS resource that is not configured with a spatial relation and if at least one condition is satisfied. The at least one condition may comprise at least one of: reception of an enabling parameter indicating use of at least two default beams for the transmission (e.g., PUSCH transmission), at least one TCI codepoint indicating at least two TCI states, a parameter associated with an uplink resource (e.g., PUSCH resource) being configured, and/or at least one of the multi-TRP repetition schemes being enabled (e.g., intra-slot repetition, TDMA-SchemeA, inter-slot repetition, etc).

The wireless device may determine the multiple (e.g., at least two) default TCI states. The at least two default TCI states may be determined as at least two TCI states of CORESETs with the at least lowest two CORESET indicators/indexes, for example, if there are at least two CORESETs in the active downlink BWP. The at least two default TCI states may be determined as at least two TCI states indicated by a lowest TCI codepoint among the TCI codepoint(s) indicating at least two TCI states. The at least two default TCI states may comprise a first default TCI state and a second default TCI state. The first default TCI state may be a TCI state of the CORESET with the lowest CORESET indicator/index and the second default TCI state may be a TCI state of a lowest TCI codepoint among TCI codepoint(s) indicating at least two TCI states. The wireless device may determine at least two default TCI states for configured uplink grant (e.g., type 1 and type-2 configured uplink grant) activated by DCI.

FIG. 17 shows an example beam management for transmission repetition. The example beam management may be used for transmission repetition via a plurality of transmission beams. The transmission repetition may correspond to repeated transmission via a plurality of time domain resources (e.g., TDM). A wireless device 1708 may send repeated transmissions (e.g., of a transport block via PUSCH resources) to a base station 1704.

FIG. 18 shows an example beam management for transmission. The example beam management may be used for transmission via a plurality of transmission beams. The transmission may correspond to transmission of portions of a message via a plurality of frequency domain resources (e.g., FDM). A wireless device 1808 may send portions of a transmission (e.g., of a transport block via PUSCH resources) to a base station 1804 via corresponding transmission occasions.

FIG. 19 shows an example transmission power determination for transmission repetition. The example transmission power determination may be used for transmission repetition via a plurality of transmission beams. The transmission repetition may correspond to repeated transmission via a plurality of time domain resources (e.g., TDM). A wireless device 1908 may send repeated transmissions (e.g., of a transport block via PUSCH resources) to a base station 1904.

FIG. 20 shows an example transmission power determination. The example transmission power determination may be used for transmission via a plurality of transmission beams. The transmission may correspond to transmission of portions of a message via a plurality of frequency domain resources (e.g., FDM). A wireless device 2008 may send portions of a transmission (e.g., of a transport block via PUSCH resources) to a base station 2004 via corresponding transmission occasions.

A wireless device (e.g., the wireless device 1708, the wireless device 1808, the wireless device 1908, or the wireless device 2008) may receive one or more messages (e.g., at or after time T0 as shown in FIGS. 17-20. The wireless device may receive the one or more messages from a base station (e.g., the base station 1704, the base station 1804, the base station 1904, or the base station 2004). The one or more messages may comprise one or more configuration parameters (e.g., configuration parameters 1712, configuration parameters 1812, configuration parameters 1912, or configuration parameters 2012). The one or more configuration parameters may comprise RRC configuration parameter(s). The one or more configuration parameters may comprise RRC reconfiguration parameter(s).

The one or more configuration parameters may be for a cell. At least one configuration parameter of the one or more configuration parameters may be for a cell. The cell may be a primary cell (e.g., PCell), a secondary cell (e.g., SCell), or a secondary cell configured with PUCCH (e.g., PUCCH SCell). The cell may be an unlicensed cell (e.g., operating in an unlicensed band). The cell may be a licensed cell (e.g., operating in a licensed band). The cell may operate in a first frequency range (e.g., FR1). FR1 may comprise frequency bands below 6 GHz (or any other frequency bands). The cell may operate in a second frequency range (e.g., FR2). FR2 may comprise frequency bands within a range of 24 GHz to 52.6 GHz (or any other frequency bands).

The wireless device may perform uplink transmissions (e.g., PUSCH transmissions, PUCCH transmissions, SRS transmissions) via the cell at a first time and via a first frequency/frequency range. The wireless device may perform downlink receptions (e.g., PDCCH reception, PDSCH reception) via the cell at a second time and via a second frequency. The cell may operate in a time-division duplex (TDD) mode. The first frequency and the second frequency may be the same or different in the TDD mode. The cell may operate in a frequency-division duplex (FDD) mode. The first frequency and the second frequency may be different in the FDD mode. The first time and the second time may be the same in the FDD mode.

The wireless device may be in an RRC connected mode. The wireless device may be in an RRC idle mode. The wireless device may be in an RRC inactive mode.

The cell may comprise a plurality of BWPs. The plurality of BWPs may comprise one or more uplink BWPs comprising an uplink BWP of the cell. The plurality of BWPs may comprise one or more downlink BWPs comprising a downlink BWP of the cell.

A BWP of the plurality of BWPs may be an active state or an inactive state. The wireless device may monitor a downlink channel/signal (e.g., PDCCH, DCI, CSI-RS, PDSCH) on/for/via a downlink BWP of the one or more downlink BWPs, for example, if the downlink BWP is in an active state. The wireless device may receive a PDSCH transmission via a downlink BWP of the one or more downlink BWPs, for example, if the downlink BWP is in an active state. The wireless device may not monitor a downlink channel/signal (e.g., PDCCH, DCI, CSI-RS, PDSCH) on/via/for a downlink BWP of the one or more downlink BWPs, for example, if the downlink BWP is in an inactive state. The wireless device may stop monitoring (or receiving) a downlink channel/signal (e.g., PDCCH, DCI, CSI-RS, PDSCH) on/via/for a downlink BWP of the one or more downlink BWPs, for example, if the downlink BWP is in an inactive state. The wireless device may not receive a PDSCH transmission on/via/for a downlink BWP of the one or more downlink BWPs, for example, if the downlink BWP is in an inactive state. The wireless device may stop receiving a PDSCH transmission on/via/for a downlink BWP of the one or more downlink BWPs, for example, if the downlink BWP is in an inactive state.

The wireless device may send/transmit an uplink signal (e.g., PUCCH transmission, preamble, PUSCH transmission, PRACH transmission, SRS, etc.) on/via an uplink BWP of the one or more uplink BWPs, for example, if the uplink BWP is in an active state. The wireless device may not send/transmit an uplink signal (e.g., PUCCH transmission, preamble, PUSCH transmission, PRACH transmission, SRS, etc.) on/via an uplink BWP of the one or more uplink BWPs, for example, if the uplink BWP is in an inactive state.

The wireless device may activate the downlink BWP of the one or more downlink BWPs of the cell. The activating the downlink BWP may comprise that the wireless device sets (or switches to) the downlink BWP as an active downlink BWP of the cell. The activating the downlink BWP may comprise that the wireless device sets the downlink BWP in the active state. The activating the downlink BWP may comprise switching the downlink BWP from the inactive state to the active state.

The wireless device may activate the uplink BWP of the one or more uplink BWPs of the cell. The activating the uplink BWP may comprise that the wireless device sets (or switches to) the uplink BWP as an active uplink BWP of the cell. The activating the uplink BWP may comprise that the wireless device sets the uplink BWP in the active state. The activating the uplink BWP may comprise switching the uplink BWP from the inactive state to the active state.

The one or more configuration parameters may be for the (active) downlink BWP of the cell. At least one configuration parameter of the one or more configuration parameters may be for the downlink BWP of the cell. The one or more configuration parameters may be for the (active) uplink BWP of the cell. At least one configuration parameter of the one or more configuration parameters may be for the uplink BWP of the cell.

The wireless device may send/transmit (e.g., to the base station), a wireless device capability message. The wireless device capability message may comprise wireless device capability information. The wireless device capability information may indicate (e.g., comprise an indication of) support for beam correspondence without uplink beam sweeping (e.g., higher layer parameter beamCorrespondenceWithoutUL-BeamSweeping). The wireless device may set a value of the parameter in the wireless device capability message to a first value (e.g., one, or any other value) to indicate support for beam correspondence without uplink sweeping.

The wireless device may select a (suitable) beam (or spatial domain transmission filter) for an uplink transmission. The wireless device may select a (suitable) beam (or spatial domain transmission filter) for an uplink transmission based on downlink measurements without relying on uplink beam sweeping, for example, based on the wireless device capability information indicating support for beam correspondence without uplink beam sweeping. The wireless device may not select the (suitable) beam (or spatial domain transmission filter) for the uplink transmission based on uplink beam sweeping.

The wireless device capability information may indicate support for repetitions of transmission of an uplink signal (e.g., PUCCH transmission, PUSCH transmission, transport block, SRS, etc.). The repetitions may be based on TDM, FDM, SDM, and/or CDM.

The one or more configuration parameters may indicate a plurality of uplink resources. The plurality of uplink resources may correspond to (or may be indicated for) the cell. The cell may comprise the plurality of uplink resources. The plurality of uplink resources may be on (or indicated for) the (active) uplink BWP of the cell. The (active) uplink BWP of the cell may comprise the plurality of uplink resources.

The plurality of uplink resources may comprise/be a plurality of PUCCH resources. The plurality of uplink resources may comprise/be a plurality of SRS resources. The plurality of uplink resources may comprise/be a plurality of PUSCH resources. The wireless device may receive DCI (e.g., corresponding to DCI format 0_0, DCI format 0_1, DCI format 0_2, etc.). The DCI may schedule transmission of one or more transport blocks via the plurality of PUSCH resources. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate the plurality of PUSCH resources for a configured uplink grant (e.g., type 1 configured uplink grant, type 2 configured uplink grant). The wireless device may send/transmit one or more transport blocks, for the configured uplink grant, via the plurality of PUSCH resources.

The one or more configuration parameters may comprise/indicate a plurality of uplink resource indexes (e.g., identifiers, indicators, SRS resource indicators/IDs, PUCCH-ResourceIds, etc.). The plurality of uplink resource indexes may identify/indicate the plurality of uplink resources. Each uplink resource of the plurality of uplink resources may be identified/indicated by a respective uplink resource index/identifier of the plurality of uplink resource indexes/identifiers. A first uplink resource of the plurality of uplink resources may be identified/indicated by a first uplink resource index/identifier of the plurality of uplink resource indexes/identifiers. A second uplink resource of the plurality of uplink resources may be identified/indicated by a second uplink resource index/identifier of the plurality of uplink resource indexes/identifiers. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate the plurality of uplink resources based on the one or more configuration parameters comprising/indicating the plurality of uplink resource indexes/identifiers identifying/indicating the plurality of uplink resources.

The one or more configuration parameters may comprise an enabling parameter (e.g., enableDefaultBeamP1ForPUSCH0_0, enableDefaultBeamP1ForPUSCH0_1, enableDefaultBeamP1ForPUCCH, enableDefaultBeamP1ForSRS). The enabling parameter may indicate a value (e.g., enabled, disabled). The value may indicate whether the enabling parameter is enabled or disabled. The enabling parameter may be enabled. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate that the enabling parameter is enabled. A value of the enabling parameter may indicate that the enabling parameter is enabled. The enabling parameter may be for the cell. The enabling parameter may enable determination/selection of a default spatial relation for transmission of an uplink signal (e.g., SR, CSI, HARQ-ACK, UCI, PUCCH transmission, PUSCH transmission, SRS, transport block) via an uplink resource (e.g., PUCCH resource, SRS resource, PUSCH resource). The enabling parameter may enable determination/selection of a default path loss reference signal for transmission of the uplink signal via the uplink resource. The plurality of uplink resources may comprise the uplink resource.

The wireless device may determine/select a default spatial relation and/or a default path loss reference signal for transmission of the uplink signal via the uplink resource. The wireless device may determine/select a default spatial relation and/or a default path loss reference signal for transmission of the uplink signal via the uplink resource, for example, based on the one or more configuration parameters comprising the enabling parameter that is enabled.

The wireless device may determine/select a default spatial relation and/or a default path loss reference signal, for example, based on the uplink resource not being provided with a spatial relation (e.g., PUCCH-SpatialRelationInfo, spatialRelationInfo). The uplink resource not being provided with the spatial relation may comprise the one or more configuration parameters not indicating a spatial relation. The uplink resource not being provided with the spatial relation may comprise the one or more configuration parameters not indicating a spatial relation for the uplink resource. The uplink resource not being provided with the spatial relation may comprise the wireless device not receiving an activation command (e.g., MAC CE) indicating a spatial relation for the uplink resource. The uplink resource not being provided with the spatial relation may comprise the wireless device receiving DCI (e.g., corresponding to DCI format 0_0, DCI format 0_1, DCI format 0_2) scheduling transmission of the uplink signal (e.g., PUSCH transmission, a transport block) via the uplink resource, where the DCI does not comprise a field indicating a spatial relation. The field may be an SRS resource indicator (SRI) field.

The wireless device may determine/select a default spatial relation and/or a default path loss reference signal, for example, based on (e.g., in response to) the uplink resource not being provided with at least one path loss reference signal (e.g., provided by a higher layer parameter pathlossReferenceRSs, a higher layer parameter PUSCH-PathlossReferenceRS, a higher layer parameter SRS-PathlossReferenceRS). The uplink resource not being provided with the at least one path loss reference signal may comprise the one or more configuration parameters not indicating at least one path loss reference signal for an SRS resource set comprising the uplink resource. The uplink resource not being provided with the at least one path loss reference signal may comprise the wireless device not receiving an activation command (e.g., MAC CE) indicating at least one path loss reference signal for an SRS resource set comprising the uplink resource. The uplink resource not being provided with the at least one path loss reference signal may comprise the one or more configuration parameters not indicating at least one path loss reference signal for the uplink BWP comprising the uplink resource. The uplink resource not being provided with the at least one path loss reference signal may comprise the wireless device not receiving an activation command (e.g., MAC CE) indicating at least one path loss reference signal for the uplink BWP comprising the uplink resource. The uplink resource not being provided with the at least one path loss reference signal may comprise the one or more configuration parameters not indicating at least one path loss reference signal for the uplink resource. The uplink resource not being provided with the at least one path loss reference signal may comprise the wireless device not receiving an activation command (e.g., MAC CE) indicating at least one path loss reference signal for the uplink resource. The wireless device may determine/select the default spatial relation and/or the default path loss reference signal, for example, based on (e.g., in response to) the one or more configuration parameters not indicating at least one path loss reference signal (e.g., for the uplink BWP, the SRS resource set, PUCCH configuration parameters of the uplink BWP, or PUSCH configuration parameters of the uplink BWP).

The one or more configuration parameters may comprise a second enabling parameter (e.g., enableTwoDefaultBeamsP1ForPUSCH0_0, enableTwoDefaultBeamsP1ForPUSCH0_1, enableTwoDefaultBeamsP1ForPUCCH, enableTwoDefaultBeamsP1ForSRS). The second enabling parameter may indicate a value (e.g., enabled, disabled). The value may indicate whether the second enabling parameter is enabled or disabled. The second enabling parameter may be enabled. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate that the second enabling parameter is enabled. A value of the second enabling parameter may indicate that the second enabling parameter is enabled. The second enabling parameter may be for the cell. The second enabling parameter may enable determination/selection of at least two default spatial relations for transmission of an uplink signal (e.g., SR, CSI, HARQ-ACK, UCI, PUCCH transmission, PUSCH transmission, transport block, SRS) via an uplink resource (e.g., PUCCH resource, SRS resource, PUSCH resource). The second enabling parameter may enable determination/selection of at least two default path loss reference signals for transmission of the uplink signal via the uplink resource. The plurality of uplink resources of the cell may comprise the uplink resource.

The wireless device may determine/select at least two default spatial relations and at least two default path loss reference signals for transmission of the uplink signal via the uplink resource. The wireless device may determine/select at least two default spatial relations and/or at least two default path loss reference signals for transmission of the uplink signal via the uplink resource, for example, based on the one or more configuration parameters comprising the second enabling parameter that is enabled.

The second enabling parameter may be for an uplink resource of the plurality of uplink resources. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate a respective second enabling parameter for each uplink resource of the plurality of uplink resources. The second enabling parameter may enable determination/selection of at least two default spatial relations for transmission of an uplink signal (e.g., SR, CSI, HARQ-ACK, UCI, PUCCH transmission, PUSCH transmission, transport block, SRS) via the uplink resource (e.g., PUCCH resource, SRS resource, PUSCH resource). The second enabling parameter may enable determination/selection of at least two default path loss reference signals for transmission of the uplink signal via the uplink resource. The wireless device may determine/select at least two default spatial relations and/or at least two default path loss reference signals for transmission of the uplink signal via the uplink resource, for example, based on the one or more configuration parameters comprising the second enabling parameter for the uplink resource that is enabled.

The one or more configuration parameters may not comprise the second enabling parameter (e.g., enableTwoDefaultBeamsP1ForPUSCH0_0, enableTwoDefaultBeamsP1ForPUSCH0_1, enableTwoDefaultBeamsP1ForPUCCH, enableTwoDefaultBeamsP1ForSRS). The one or more configuration parameters may comprise the enabling parameter (e.g., enableDefaultBeamP1ForPUSCH0_0, enableDefaultBeamP1ForPUSCH0_1, enableDefaultBeamP1ForPUCCH, enableDefaultBeamP1ForSRS). The enabling parameter may be enabled. The wireless device may determine/select a default spatial relation and/or a default path loss reference signal for transmission of an uplink signal (e.g., SR, CSI, HARQ-ACK, UCI, PUCCH, PUSCH, transport block, SRS) via an uplink resource, for example, based on the one or more configuration parameters not comprising the second enabling parameter. The wireless device may determine/select the default spatial relation and/or the default path loss reference signal for transmission of the uplink signal via the uplink resource, for example, based on the one or more configuration parameters comprising the enabling parameter that is enabled.

The one or more configuration parameters may comprise the second enabling parameter (e.g., enableTwoDefaultBeamsP1ForPUSCH0_0, enableTwoDefaultBeamsP1ForPUSCH0_1, enableTwoDefaultBeamsP1ForPUCCH, enableTwoDefaultBeamsP1ForSRS). The second enabling parameter may not be enabled. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate that the second enabling parameter is not enabled. A value of the second enabling parameter may not indicate that the second enabling parameter is enabled. The one or more configuration parameters may comprise the enabling parameter (e.g., enableDefaultBeamP1ForPUSCH0_0, enableDefaultBeamP1ForPUSCH0_1, enableDefaultBeamP1ForPUCCH, enableDefaultBeamP1ForSRS). The enabling parameter may be enabled. The wireless device may determine/select a default spatial relation and/or a default path loss reference signal for transmission of an uplink signal (e.g., SR, CSI, HARQ-ACK, UCI, PUCCH transmission, PUSCH transmission, transport block, SRS) via an uplink resource, for example, based on the one or more configuration parameters indicating that the second enabling parameter is not enabled. The wireless device may determine/select the default spatial relation and/or the default path loss reference signal for transmission of the uplink signal via the uplink resource, for example, based on the one or more configuration parameters comprising the enabling parameter that is enabled.

The one or more configuration parameters may comprise a second enabling parameter (e.g., enableTwoDefaultBeamsP1ForPUSCH0_0, enableTwoDefaultBeamsP1ForPUSCH0_1, enableTwoDefaultBeamsP1ForPUCCH, enableTwoDefaultBeamsP1ForSRS). The one or more configuration parameters may not comprise an enabling parameter (e.g., enableDefaultBeamP1ForPUSCH0_0, enableDefaultBeamP1ForPUSCH0_1, enableDefaultBeamP1ForPUCCH, enableDefaultBeamP1ForSRS) based on the one or more configuration parameters comprising the second enabling parameter. The one or more configuration parameters may comprise an enabling parameter (e.g., enableDefaultBeamP1ForPUSCH0_0, enableDefaultBeamP1ForPUCCH, enableDefaultBeamP1ForSRS). The one or more configuration parameters may not comprise a second enabling parameter (e.g., enableTwoDefaultBeamsP1ForPUSCH0_0, enableTwoDefaultBeamsP1ForPUCCH, enableTwoDefaultBeamsP1ForSRS) based on the one or more configuration parameters comprising the enabling parameter.

The one or more configuration parameters may comprise a second enabling parameter (e.g., enableTwoDefaultBeamsP1ForPUSCH0_0, enableTwoDefaultBeamsP1ForPUCCH, enableTwoDefaultBeamsP1ForSRS). The second enabling parameter may be enabled. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate that the second enabling parameter is enabled. A value of the second enabling parameter may indicate that the second enabling parameter is enabled. The one or more configuration parameters may not comprise an enabling parameter (e.g., enableDefaultBeamP1ForPUSCH0_0, enableDefaultBeamP1ForPUCCH, enableDefaultBeamP1ForSRS) based on the one or more configuration parameters comprising the second enabling parameter that is enabled. The one or more configuration parameters may comprise an enabling parameter (e.g., enableDefaultBeamP1ForPUSCH0_0, enableDefaultBeamP1ForPUCCH, enableDefaultBeamP1ForSRS). The enabling parameter may not be enabled. The one or more configuration parameters may not indicate that the enabling parameter is enabled. A value of the enabling parameter may not indicate that the enabling parameter is enabled. The enabling parameter may not be enabled based on the second enabling parameter being enabled.

The one or more configuration parameters may comprise an enabling parameter (e.g., enableDefaultBeamP1ForPUSCH0_0, enableDefaultBeamP1ForPUCCH, enableDefaultBeamP1ForSRS). The enabling parameter may be enabled. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate that the enabling parameter is enabled. A value of the enabling parameter may indicate that the enabling parameter is enabled. The one or more configuration parameters may not comprise a second enabling parameter (e.g., enableTwoDefaultBeamsP1ForPUSCH0_0, enableTwoDefaultBeamsP1ForPUSCH0_1, enableTwoDefaultBeamsP1ForPUCCH, enableTwoDefaultBeamsP1ForSRS) based on the one or more configuration parameters comprising the enabling parameter that is enabled. The one or more configuration parameters may comprise a second enabling parameter (e.g., enableTwoDefaultBeamsP1ForPUSCH0_0, enableTwoDefaultBeamsP1ForPUCCH, enableTwoDefaultBeamsP1ForSRS). The second enabling parameter may not be enabled. The one or more configuration parameters may not indicate that the second enabling parameter is enabled. A value of the second enabling parameter may not indicate that the second enabling parameter is enabled. The second enabling parameter may not be enabled based on the enabling parameter being enabled.

The enabling parameter and the second enabling parameter may not be enabled at the same time. The one or more configuration parameters may not comprise the enabling parameter that is enabled and the second enabling parameter that is enabled (e.g., at the same time, or simultaneously). The one or more configuration parameters may comprise the enabling parameter that is enabled and the second enabling parameter that is disabled (e.g., at the same time, or simultaneously). The one or more configuration parameters may comprise the enabling parameter that is disabled and the second enabling parameter that is enabled (e.g., at the same time, or simultaneously).

The one or more configuration parameters may comprise the enabling parameter that is enabled. The one or more configuration parameters may comprise the second enabling parameter that is enabled. The wireless device may ignore the enabling parameter, for example, based on the enabling parameter being enabled and the second enabling parameter being enabled. The ignoring the enabling parameter may comprise setting the enabling parameter to indicate that the enabling parameter is disabled. The ignoring the enabling parameter may comprise not applying the enabling parameter (e.g., not performing actions required for and/or based on the enabling parameter). The wireless device may ignore the second enabling parameter, for example, based on the enabling parameter being enabled and the second enabling parameter being enabled. The ignoring the second enabling parameter may comprise setting the second enabling parameter to indicate that the second enabling parameter is disabled. The ignoring the second enabling parameter may comprise not applying the second enabling parameter (e.g., not performing actions required for and/or based on the second enabling parameter).

The one or more configuration parameters may not indicate at least one path loss reference reference signal (RS) (e.g., pathlossReferenceRSs, PUCCH-PathlossReferenceRS, PathlossReferenceRS-Config, pathlossReferenceRS-List-r16, pathlossReferenceRS-List, SRS-PathlossReferenceRS). The one or more configuration parameters may not indicate the at least one path loss reference RS for the cell. The one or more configuration parameters may not indicate the at least one path loss reference RS for the (active) uplink BWP of the cell. The one or more configuration parameters may not indicate the at least one path loss reference signal for an SRS resource set of the (active) uplink BWP of the cell. The SRS resource set may comprise the uplink resource. The one or more configuration parameters may comprise one or more SRS configuration parameters, PUCCH configuration parameters, and/or PUSCH configuration parameters of the (active) uplink BWP. The one or more SRS configuration parameters, PUCCH configuration parameters, and/or PUSCH configuration parameters may not indicate the at least one path loss reference signal. The wireless device may not be provided with the at least one path loss reference RS, for example, based on the one or more configuration parameters not indicating the at least one path loss reference RS.

The wireless device may not receive an activation command (e.g., SRS pathloss reference RS activation/deactivation MAC CE, PUCCH spatial relation activation/deactivation MAC CE, enhanced PUCCH spatial relation activation/deactivation MAC CE, etc.) indicating at least one path loss reference RS. The wireless device may not receive the activation command indicating the at least one path loss reference RS for the (active) uplink BWP. The wireless device may not receive the activation command indicating the at least one path loss reference RS for the cell. The wireless device may not receive the activation command indicating the at least one path loss reference signal for an SRS resource set comprising the uplink resource. The wireless device may not be provided with the at least one path loss reference RS, for example, based on not receiving the activation command indicating the at least one path loss reference RS. The wireless device may not receive the activation command indicating the at least one path loss reference RS for an uplink resource of the plurality of uplink resources. The wireless device may not be provided with the at least one path loss reference RS for the uplink resource, for example, based on not receiving the activation command indicating the at least one path loss reference RS for the uplink resource.

The one or more configuration parameters may not indicate a spatial relation (e.g., PUCCH-SpatialRelationInfo, spatialRelationInfo). The one or more configuration parameters may not indicate the spatial relation for the cell. The one or more configuration parameters may not indicate the spatial relation for the (active) uplink BWP of the cell. The wireless device may not be provided with the spatial relation, for example, based on the one or more configuration parameters not indicating the spatial relation. The one or more configuration parameters may not indicate the spatial relation for an uplink resource of the plurality of uplink resources. The wireless device may not be provided with a spatial relation for the uplink resource, for example, based on the one or more configuration parameters not indicating the spatial relation for the uplink resource.

The one or more configuration parameters may indicate a plurality of spatial relations (e.g., PUCCH-SpatialRelationInfo, spatialRelationInfo). The wireless device may not receive an activation command (e.g., AP/SP SRS activation/deactivation MAC CE, PUCCH spatial relation activation/deactivation MAC CE, etc.) indicating a spatial relation, among the plurality of spatial relations, for an uplink resource of the plurality of uplink resources. The wireless device may not be provided with a spatial relation for the uplink resource, for example, based on not receiving the activation command indicating the spatial relation for the uplink resource. The wireless device may not be provided with a spatial relation, for example, based on not receiving the activation command indicating the spatial relation.

The wireless device may receive DCI (e.g., corresponding to DCI format 0_0) scheduling transmission of an uplink signal (e.g., transport block, PUSCH transmission). The DCI may schedule transmission of the uplink signal via an uplink resource (e.g., a PUSCH resource) of the plurality of uplink resources. The DCI may schedule transmission of the uplink signal via the (active) uplink BWP. The DCI may not indicate a spatial relation for transmission of the uplink signal. The DCI may not comprise a field (e.g., SRI field) indicating the spatial relation.

The wireless device may not be provided with a spatial relation for the uplink resource, for example, based on receiving the DCI that does not indicate the spatial relation for transmission of the uplink signal via the uplink resource.

The wireless device may receive DCI (e.g., corresponding to DCI format 0_1, or DCI format 0-2) scheduling transmission of an uplink signal (e.g., transport block, PUSCH transmission). The DCI may schedule transmission of the uplink signal via an uplink resource (e.g., PUSCH resource) of the plurality of uplink resources. The DCI may schedule transmission of the uplink signal via the (active) uplink BWP. The DCI may comprise a field (e.g., SRI field) indicating the uplink resource. The uplink resource may not be provided with a spatial relation. The wireless device may not be provided with a spatial relation for transmission of the uplink signal, for example, based on the uplink resource, indicated by the DCI, not being provided with the spatial relation.

FIGS. 21A-21C show example configurations of TCI states associated with TCI codepoints and/or CORESETs. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate one or more CORESETs (e.g., first CORESET in FIG. 21B, first CORESET and second CORESET in FIG. 21C). The one or more configuration parameters may indicate the one or more CORESETs for the (active) downlink BWP of the cell. The (active) downlink BWP of the cell may comprise the one or more CORESETs.

The one or more configuration parameters may indicate one or more CORESET indicators/indexes (e.g., provided by a higher layer parameter ControlResourceSetId) for the one or more CORESETs. Each CORESET of the one or more CORESETs may be identified/indicated by a respective CORESET indicator/index of the one or more CORESET indicators/indexes. A first CORESET of the one or more CORESETs may be identified by a first CORESET index of the one or more CORESET indexes. A second CORESET of the one or more CORESETs may be identified by a second CORESET index of the one or more CORESET indexes. A CORESET index may be a CORESET identifier.

A first CORESET of the one or more CORESETs may be identified/indicated by a CORESET index of the one or more CORESET indexes. The CORESET index may be lowest (or highest) among the one or more CORESET indexes. The first CORESET (e.g., first CORESET in FIG. 21B and first CORESET in FIG. 21C) may be identified/indicated by a CORESET index that is lowest among the one or more CORESET indexes of the one or more CORESETs. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate a first TCI state (e.g., provided by a higher layer parameter tci-StatesPDCCH-ToAddList, TCI state 8 in FIG. 21B and FIG. 21C) for the first CORESET.

The one or more configuration parameters may indicate a plurality of TCI states (e.g., provided by a higher layer parameter tci-StatesPDCCH-ToAddList) for the first CORESET. The wireless device may receive (e.g., at or after time T1 in FIGS. 17-20) an activation command (e.g., TCI state indication for wireless device-specific PDCCH MAC CE). The activation command may activate (e.g.,select, indicate, or update) a first TCI state (e.g., TCI state 8 in FIG. 21B and FIG. 21C) for the first CORESET. The activation command may correspond to activation command 1716, activation command 1816, activation command 1916, or activation command 2016. The plurality of TCI states may comprise the first TCI state. The activation command may comprise one or more fields. A first field of the one or more fields may indicate/comprise the CORESET indicator/index of the first CORESET. A second field of the one or more fields may indicate/comprise a first TCI state indicator/index of the first TCI state. A third field of the one or more fields may indicate/comprise a serving cell indicator/index (e.g., provided by a higher layer parameter ServCellIndex) of the cell. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate the serving cell index for the cell. A fourth field of the one or more fields may indicate/comprise a downlink BWP indicator/index of the downlink BWP. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate the downlink BWP index for the downlink BWP.

The one or more configuration parameters may indicate TCI state indicators/indexes (e.g., provided by a higher layer parameter TCI-StateId) for the plurality of TCI states. Each TCI state of the plurality of TCI states may be identified/indicated by a respective TCI state indicator/index of the TCI state indicators/indexes. A first TCI state of the plurality of TCI states may be indicated/identified by a first TCI state indicator/index of the TCI state indicators/indexes. A second TCI state of the plurality of TCI states may be indicated/identified by a second TCI state indicator/index of the TCI state indicators/indexes. The TCI state indicators/indexes may comprise the first TCI state indicator/index identifying/indicating/of the first TCI state of the first CORESET. A TCI state indicator/index may be a TCI state identifier.

The first TCI state may indicate a first reference signal (e.g., CSI-RS, SSB/PBCH block, SRS, DM-RS). The first TCI state may comprise a first reference signal indicator/index (e.g., provided by a higher layer parameter referenceSignal, ssb-index, csi-RS-Index, NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceId). The first reference signal indicator/index may identify (or indicate) the first reference signal. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate the first reference signal indicator/index for the first TCI state. The first TCI state may indicate a first quasi co-location type for the first reference signal. The first quasi co-location (QCL) type may be QCL-type D (or any other QCL type).

The first TCI state may correspond to a first QCL assumption (or property, or structure) of the first CORESET. The first QCL assumption of the first CORESET may indicate at least one of: channel characteristics, Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, delay spread, and/or spatial receive filter for the first CORESET.

The wireless device may monitor downlink control channels for DCI. The wireless device may monitor downlink control channels for DCI via the first CORESET based on the first TCI state. The wireless device, may monitor the downlink control channels, for the DCI, via the first CORESET based on the first TCI state, for example, based on (e.g., in response to) the receiving the activation command activating the first TCI state for the first CORESET. The wireless device may monitor the downlink control channels, for the DCI, via the first CORESET based on the first TCI state, for example, based on (e.g., in response to) the one or more configuration parameters indicating the first TCI state for the first CORESET. The monitoring the downlink control channels in the first CORESET based on the first TCI state may comprise one or more DM-RS antenna ports of the downlink control channels (e.g., PDCCH) in the first CORESET being quasi co-located with the first reference signal indicated by the first TCI state. The one or more DM-RS antenna ports may be quasi co-located with the first reference signal with respect to the first quasi co-location type indicated by the first TCI state. The wireless device may receive the DCI via the first CORESET. The wireless device may receive the DCI via the first CORESET, for example, based on monitoring the downlink control channels in the first CORESET. The wireless device may receive the DCI via the first CORESET based on the first TCI state. The receiving the DCI via the first CORESET based on the first TCI state may comprise one or more DM-RS antenna ports of downlink control channels (e.g., PDCCH), in the first CORESET, with the DCI being quasi co-located with the first reference signal indicated by the first TCI state.

The one or more configuration parameters may indicate one or more configured uplink grants (e.g., by a higher layer parameter ConfiguredGrantConfig). The one or more configured uplink grants may comprise a configured uplink grant.

The configured uplink grant may be a type 1 configured uplink grant (or configured grant type 1 provided by a higher layer parameter rrc-ConfiguredUplinkGrant in the higher layer parameter ConfiguredGrantConfig). The one or more configuration parameters (e.g., RRC configuration parameters) may indicate (e.g., provide, activate) an uplink grant. The wireless device may activate the type 1 configured uplink grant based on receiving the one or more configuration parameters. The wireless device may store the uplink grant as the configured uplink grant. The wireless device may send/transmit a transport block (TB) based on/for the configured uplink grant. The wireless device may transmit the transport block (e.g., TB as shown in FIG. 17-FIG. 20) via one or more periodic uplink resources of the configured uplink grant.

The configured uplink grant may indicate at least two uplink resources (e.g., SRS resources).

The one or more configuration parameters may indicate, for the configured uplink grant, an SRI field (e.g., by an srs-ResourceIndicator in rrc-ConfiguredUplinkGrant). The SRI field may indicate the at least two uplink resources. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate a mapping between the SRI field and the at least two uplink resources. A mapping between the SRI field and the at least two uplink resources may be preconfigured (e.g., predefined, preset, fixed). A value of the SRI field may be mapped to at least two uplink resource indicators/indexes of the at least two uplink resources. The plurality of uplink resource indicators/indexes may comprise the at least two uplink resource indicators/indexes.

The one or more configuration parameters may indicate, for the configured uplink grant, at least two SRI fields (e.g., by an srs-ResourceIndicator in rrc-ConfiguredUplinkGrant). The at least two SRI fields may indicate the at least two uplink resources. Each SRI field of the at least two SRI fields may indicate a respective uplink resource of the at least two uplink resources. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate a mapping between the at least two SRI fields and the at least two uplink resources. A mapping between the at least two SRI fields and the at least two uplink resources may be preconfigured (e.g., predefined, preset, or fixed). Values of the at least two SRI fields may be mapped to at least two uplink resource indicators/indexes of the at least two uplink resources. The plurality of uplink resource indicators/indexes may comprise the at least two uplink resource indicators/indexes.

The one or more configuration parameters may indicate, for the configured uplink grant, a TCI field. The TCI field may indicate (or may be equal to) a TCI codepoint (e.g., uplink TCI codepoint, downlink TCI codepoint). The TCI codepoint may indicate the at least two uplink resources. An activation command may activate/indicate the at least two uplink resources for the TCI codepoint. The TCI codepoint may indicate/comprise at least two activated TCI states. Each TCI state of the at least two activated TCI states may indicate (or correspond to, or comprise) a respective uplink resource of the at least two uplink resources. A first TCI state of the at least two activated TCI states may indicate (or correspond to or comprise) a first uplink resource of the at least two uplink resources. The first TCI state may comprise a first uplink resource indicator/index of the first uplink resource (e.g., identifying, or indicating the first uplink resource). The plurality of uplink resource indexes/identifiers may comprise the first uplink resource index. A second TCI state of the at least two activated TCI states may indicate (or correspond to, or comprise) a second uplink resource of the at least two uplink resources. The second TCI state may comprise a second uplink resource indicator/index of the second uplink resource (e.g., identifying, or indicating the second uplink resource). The plurality of uplink resource indexes/identifiers may comprise the second uplink resource index

The wireless device may receive DCI. The DCI may correspond to a DCI format 0_1, a DCI format 0_2, or a DCI format 0_0. The DCI may schedule an uplink message (e.g., a transport block). The DCI may comprise a dynamic uplink grant for transmission of the transport block. The wireless device may send/transmit the transport block (e.g., TB as shown in FIG. 17-FIG. 20), for example, via an uplink resource indicated by the DCI (or the dynamic uplink grant).

The configured uplink grant may be a type 2 configured uplink grant (or configured grant type 2). A PDCCH transmission may indicate/provide an uplink grant, for example, in type 2 configured uplink grant. The wireless device may store the uplink grant as the configured uplink grant based on receiving DCI (or layer 1 signaling) indicating a configured uplink grant activation. The DCI may activate the configured uplink grant. The wireless device may send/transmit a transport block (e.g., TB in FIG. 17-FIG. 20) for the configured uplink grant. The wireless device may transmit the transport block (e.g., a PUSCH transmission) via one or more periodic uplink resources.

The DCI may indicate at least two uplink resources (e.g., SRS resources). The DCI may indicate/comprise an SRI field indicating the at least two uplink resources. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate a mapping between the SRI field and the at least two uplink resources. A mapping between the SRI field and the at least two uplink resources may be preconfigured (e.g., predefined, preset, or fixed). A value of the SRI field may be mapped to at least two uplink resource indicators/indexes of the at least two uplink resources. The plurality of uplink resource indicators/indexes may comprise the at least two uplink resource indicators/indexes.

The DCI may indicate/comprise at least two SRI fields indicating the at least two uplink resources. Each SRI field of the at least two SRI fields may indicate a respective uplink resource of the at least two uplink resources. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate a mapping between the at least two SRI fields and the at least two uplink resources. A mapping between the at least two SRI fields and the at least two uplink resources may be preconfigured (e.g., predefined, preset, or fixed). Values of the at least two SRI fields may be mapped to at least two uplink resource indicators/indexes of the at least two uplink resources. The plurality of uplink resource indicators/indexes may comprise the at least two uplink resource indicators/indexes.

The DCI may comprise a TCI field. The TCI field may indicate (or comprise) a TCI codepoint (e.g., uplink TCI codepoint, downlink TCI codepoint). The TCI codepoint may indicate the at least two uplink resources. An activation command may activate/indicate the at least two uplink resources for the TCI codepoint. The TCI codepoint may indicate at least two activated TCI states. Each TCI state of the at least two activated TCI states may indicate (or correspond to, or comprise) a respective uplink resource of the at least two uplink resources. For example, a first TCI state of the at least two activated TCI states may indicate (or correspond to) a first uplink resource of the at least two uplink resources. The first TCI state may comprise a first uplink resource indicator/index of the first uplink resource (e.g., indicating/identifying the first uplink resource). The plurality of uplink resource indexes/identifiers may comprise the first uplink resource index. A second TCI state of the at least two activated TCI states may indicate (or correspond to, or comprise) a second uplink resource of the at least two uplink resources. The second TCI state may comprise a second uplink resource indicator/index of the second uplink resource (e.g., indicating/identifying the second uplink resource). The plurality of uplink resource indexes/identifiers may comprise the second uplink resource index.

The wireless device may determine/select at least two TCI states. The wireless device may determine/select the at least two TCI states, for example, based on the one or more configuration parameters or the DCI. The wireless device may determine/select the at least two TCI states for transmission of the transport block. For example, as shown in FIG. 17-FIG. 20, the wireless device may determine/select (e.g., at or before time T2) TCI state 8 and TCI state 23 as the at least two TCI states.

The wireless device may be served by (e.g., transmit to and/or receive from) a plurality of

TRPs. The wireless device may determine/select the at least two TCI states based on being served by the plurality of TRPs.

The wireless device may determine/select the at least two TCI states based on at least one TCI codepoint (e.g., TCI codepoint 001 and TCI codepoint 010 in FIG. 21A and FIG. 21B), of one or more TCI codepoints, comprising/indicating at least two activated TCI states. The wireless device may determine/select the at least two TCI states based on the TCI codepoint (e.g., indicated by the TCI field of the DCI or the configured uplink grant) indicating the at least two activated TCI states. The wireless device may determine/select the at least two TCI states based on the DCI indicating at least two uplink resources. The wireless device may determine/select the at least two TCI states based on the configured uplink grant indicating at least two uplink resources.

The wireless device may determine/select the at least two TCI states based on the one or more configuration parameters indicating at least two CORESET pool indicators/indexes for the one or more CORESETs. A first TRP of the plurality of TRPs may send/transmit DCI via one or more first CORESETs with a first CORESET pool indicator/index (e.g., 0, or any other first value). The first TRP may not send/transmit DCI via one or more second CORESETs with a second CORESET pool indicator/index (e.g., 1, or any other second value). A second TRP of the plurality of TRPs may not send/transmit DCI via the one or more first CORESETs with the first CORESET pool indicator/index. The second TRP may send/transmit DCIs via the one or more second CORESETs with the second CORESET pool indicator/index. The at least two CORESET pool indicators/indexes may comprise the first CORESET pool indicator/index and the second CORESET pool indicator/index. The one or more CORESETs may comprise the one or more first CORESETs and the one or more second CORESETs. The first CORESET pool indicator/index may be different from the second CORESET pool indicator/index.

The wireless device may determine/select the at least two TCI states, for example, based on the one or more configuration parameters comprising the enabling parameter. The enabling parameter may be enabled. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate that the enabling parameter is enabled.

The wireless device may determine/select the at least two TCI states, for example, based on the one or more configuration parameters comprising the second enabling parameter. The second enabling parameter may be enabled. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate that the second enabling parameter is enabled.

The wireless device may determine/select the at least two TCI states, for example, based on the one or more configuration parameters indicating a repetition scheme (e.g., FDM-Scheme, TDM-Scheme, SDM-Scheme, CDM-Scheme). The repetition scheme may be for repetitions of transmission of transport blocks (e.g., PUSCH repetition).

The wireless device may determine/select the at least two TCI states, for example, based on the wireless device capability information indicating/comprising the support of beam correspondence without uplink beam sweeping. The wireless device may determine/select the at least two TCI states, for example, based on the wireless device capability information indicating support for transmission repetition (e.g., for transmission of the transport block).

The wireless device may determine/select the at least two TCI states, for example, based on not being provided with the at least one path loss reference RS. The wireless device may determine/select the at least two TCI states, for example, based on the one or more configuration parameters not indicating the at least one path loss reference RS. The wireless device may determine/select the at least two TCI states, for example, based on not receiving the activation command indicating the at least one path loss reference RS.

The wireless device may determine/select the at least two TCI states, for example, based on not being provided with spatial relations (e.g., PUCCH-SpatialRelationInfo, spatialRelationInfo) (e.g., for the at least two uplink resources). The wireless device not being provided with spatial relations for the at least two uplink resources may comprise that each uplink resource of the at least two uplink resources is provided with a spatial relation. The wireless device may determine/select the at least two TCI states, for example, based on the one or more configuration parameters not indicating spatial relations (e.g., for the at least two uplink resources). The one or more configuration parameters not indicating spatial relations for the at least two uplink resources may comprise the one or more configuration parameters not indicating a spatial relation for each uplink resource of the at least two uplink resources.

The wireless device may determine/select the at least two TCI states, for example, based on not receiving one or more activation commands indicating spatial relations (e.g., for the at least two uplink resources). The wireless device not receiving one or more activation commands indicating spatial relations for the at least two uplink resources may comprise that the wireless device does not receive the one or more activation commands indicating a respective spatial relation for each uplink resource of the at least two uplink resources.

The DCI may comprise a time domain resource alignment (TDRA) field. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate a TDRA field for the configured uplink grant (e.g., type 1 configured uplink grant). The TDRA field may indicate a resource allocation table. The resource allocation table may be indicated/configured by the one or more configuration parameters. The resource allocation table may be preconfigured (e.g., fixed). The TDRA field may indicate a quantity of repetitions (e.g., numberofrepetitions) for the transport block. The resource allocation table may comprise/indicate the quantity of repetitions (e.g., numberofrepetitions). The quantity of repetitions (e.g., numberofrepetitions) may be present in/indicated by the resource allocation table. The wireless device may determine/select the at least two TCI states, for example, based on the TDRA field indicating the quantity of repetitions. For example, as shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 19, the quantity of repetitions may be equal to four (e.g., numberofrepetitions=4). In other examples, the quantity of repetitions may be equal to any other value.

A higher layer parameter indicating a quantity of repetitions (e.g., numberofrepetitions) may or may not be present in the resource allocation table indicated by the TDRA field of the DCI. A higher layer parameter indicating a quantity of repetitions (e.g., numberofrepetitions) may or may not be present in the resource allocation table indicated by the TDRA field of the configured uplink grant (e.g., type 1 configured uplink grant). One or more configuration parameters may indicate a quantity of repetitions (e.g., via a higher layer parameter pusch-AggregationFactor). The wireless device may determine/select the at least two TCI states, for example, based on the one or more configuration parameters indicating the quantity of repetitions. For example, as shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 19, the quantity of repetitions may be equal to four (e.g., pusch-AggregationFactor=4). In other example, the quantity of repetitions may be equal to any other value.

The DCI may comprise an antenna port field. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate, for the configured uplink grant, an antenna port field. The antenna port field may indicate DM-RS ports within at least two code division multiplexing (CDM) groups. The wireless device may determine/select the at least two TCI states, for example, based on the antenna port fields indicating the DM-RS ports within the at least two CDM groups.

The at least two uplink resources may be dedicated uplink resource(s). The dedicated uplink resource(s) may not be shared with a second wireless device different from the wireless device. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate the dedicated uplink resource(s). The at least two uplink resources may or may not be indicated/configured with an SIB message.

The (determined/selected) at least two TCI states may indicate at least two reference signals (e.g., CSI-RS, SSB/PBCH block, SRS, DM-RS). Each TCI state of the at least two TCI states may indicate a respective reference signal of at least two reference signals. Each TCI state of the at least two TCI states may comprise a reference signal indicator/index (e.g., provided by a higher layer parameter referenceSignal, ssb-index, csi-RS-Index, NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceId) identifying (e.g., indicating, of) the respective reference signal. A first TCI state (e.g., TCI state 8) of the at least two TCI states may indicate a first reference signal of the at least two reference signals. A second TCI state (e.g., TCI state 23) of the at least two TCI states may indicate a second reference signal of the at least two reference signals. The first TCI state may comprise a first reference signal indicator/index (e.g., provided by a higher layer parameter referenceSignal, ssb-index, csi-RS-Index, NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceId) identifying (e.g., indicating, of) the first reference signal. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate the first reference signal indicator/index for the first TCI state. The second TCI state may comprise a second reference signal indicator/index (e.g., provided by a higher layer parameter referenceSignal, ssb-index, csi-RS-Index, NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceId) identifying (e.g., indicating, of) the second reference signal. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate the second reference signal indicator/index for the second TCI state.

The (determined/selected) at least two TCI states may indicate one or more quasi co-location types. Each TCI state of the at least two TCI states may indicate a respective quasi co-location type of the one or more quasi co-location types. For example, the first TCI state may indicate a first quasi co-location type for the first reference signal. The second TCI state may indicate a second quasi co-location type for the second reference signal. The first quasi co-location type and the second quasi co-location type may be the same. For example, the first quasi co-location type may be QCL type D and the second quasi co-location type may be QCLtype D. The first quasi co-location type may be QCL type A and the second quasi co-location type may be QCL type A. The first quasi co-location type and the second quasi co-location type may be different. For example, the first quasi co-location type may be QCL type A and the second quasi co-location type may be QCL type D. The first quasi co-location type may be QCL type C and the second quasi co-location type may be QCL type B. The one or more quasi co-location types may comprise the first quasi co-location type and the second quasi co-location type.

The wireless device may determine a plurality of spatial domain transmission filters based on the at least two TCI states. The wireless device may determine the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters for transmission of the transport block. The wireless device may perform transmission of the transport block with/using the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters. The wireless device may transmit the transport block based on (e.g., with/using) the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters (e.g., at and/or after time T2 in FIGS. 17-20).

The wireless device may determine a spatial domain transmission filter, of the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, based on a TCI state of the at least two TCI states. The wireless device may determine each spatial domain transmission filter, of the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, based on a respective TCI state of the at least two TCI states. The determining the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters based on the at least two TCI states may comprise determining the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, for example, based on the at least two reference signals indicated by the at least two TCI states. The wireless device may determine each spatial domain transmission filter, of the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, based on a reference signal indicated by a respective TCI state of the at least two TCI states.

The wireless device may determine a first spatial domain transmission filter, of the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, for example, based on a first TCI state (e.g., TCI state 8) of the at least two TCI states. The wireless device may determine the first spatial domain transmission filter, for example, based on the first reference signal indicated by the first TCI state. The wireless device may send/transmit the transport block (or a first portion of the transport block, or one or more first data layers/streams of the transport block) with/using the first spatial domain transmission filter. The wireless device may determine a second spatial domain transmission filter, of the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, for example, based on a second TCI state (e.g., TCI state 23) of the at least two TCI states. The wireless device may determine the second spatial domain transmission filter, for example, based on the second reference signal indicated by the second TCI state. The wireless device may send/transmit the transport block (or a second portion of the transport block, or one or more second data layers/streams of the transport block) with/using the second spatial domain transmission filter.

The wireless device may determine, for transmission of the transport block, a spatial domain transmission filter based on a TCI state. The at least two TCI states may comprise the TCI state. The plurality of spatial domain transmission filters may comprise the spatial domain transmission filter. The TCI state may indicate a reference signal (e.g., CSI-RS, SSB/PBCH block, SRS, DM-RS) of the at least two reference signals. The TCI state may comprise a reference signal index/identifier/indicator (e.g., provided by a higher layer parameter referenceSignal, ssb-index, csi-RS-Index, NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceId) identifying (e.g., indicating, of) the reference signal. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate the reference signal index/identifier/indicator for the reference signal. The wireless device may determine the spatial domain transmission filter based on the reference signal indicated by the TCI state.

The reference signal may be a downlink reference signal. The downlink reference signal may comprise a SS/PBCH block. The downlink reference signal may comprise a CSI-RS (e.g., a periodic CSI-RS, a semi-persistent CSI-RS, an aperiodic CSI-RS). The downlink reference signal may comprise a DM-RS (e.g., of PDCCH, PDSCH, etc.). The wireless device may use a spatial domain receiving filter to receive the downlink reference signal. The wireless device may receive the downlink reference signal based on (e.g., using, with) the spatial domain receiving filter. The wireless device may determine that the spatial domain transmission filter used for transmission of the transport block is the same as the spatial domain receiving filter used to receive the reference signal indicated by the TCI state, for example, based on the reference signal being the downlink reference signal. The wireless device may send/transmit the transport block based on (e.g., using, with) the spatial domain transmission filter that is same as the spatial domain receiving filter, for example, based on the reference signal being the downlink reference signal. The wireless device may send/transmit the transport block based on (e.g., using, with) the spatial domain receiving filter, for example, based on the reference signal being the downlink reference signal. The wireless device may transmit the transport block based on the spatial domain receiving filter, for example, based on (e.g., in response to) the reference signal being the downlink reference signal. The determining the spatial domain transmission filter based on the TCI state may comprise determining the spatial domain receiving filter, used to receive the reference signal indicated by the TCI state, as the spatial domain transmission filter. The determining the spatial domain transmission filter based on the TCI state may comprise determining that the spatial domain transmission filter is the same as the spatial domain receiving filter used to receive the reference signal indicated by the TCI state.

The reference signal may be an uplink reference signal (e.g., periodic SRS, semi-persistent SRS, aperiodic SRS, DM-RS). The wireless device may use a second spatial domain transmission filter to send/transmit the uplink reference signal. The wireless device may send/transmit the uplink reference signal based on (e.g., using, with) the second spatial domain transmission filter. The wireless device may determine that the spatial domain transmission filter used for transmission of the transport block is the same as the second spatial domain transmission filter used to transmit the reference signal indicated by the TCI state, for example, based on the reference signal being the uplink reference signal. The wireless device may send/transmit the transport block based on (e.g., using, with) the spatial domain transmission filter that is same as the second spatial domain transmission filter used to send/transmit the uplink reference signal, for example, based on the reference signal being the uplink reference signal. The wireless device may send/transmit the transport block based on the second spatial domain transmission filter used to send/transmit the uplink reference signal, for example, based on the reference signal being the uplink reference signal. The determining the spatial domain transmission filter based on the TCI state may comprise determining the second spatial domain transmission filter, used to send/transmit the reference signal indicated by the TCI state, as the spatial domain transmission filter. The determining the spatial domain transmission filter based on the TCI state may comprise determining that the spatial domain transmission filter is the same as the second spatial domain transmission filter used to send/transmit the reference signal indicated by the TCI state.

Determining a spatial domain transmission filter based on a TCI state may comprise determining a spatial domain filter, as the spatial domain transmission filter, that is used to transmit and/or receive a reference signal indicated by the TCI state. Determining a spatial domain transmission filter based on a TCI state may comprise determining the spatial domain transmission filter that is the same as a spatial domain filter used to transmit and/or receive a reference signal indicated by the TCI state.

Determining a spatial domain transmission filter based on a reference signal indicated by a TCI state may comprise determining a spatial domain filter, as the spatial domain transmission filter, used to transmit and/or receive the reference signal. Determining a spatial domain transmission filter based on a reference signal indicated by a TCI state may comprise determining the spatial domain transmission filter that is the same as a spatial domain filter used to transmit and/or receive the reference signal.

Determining a spatial domain transmission filter based on a reference signal indicated by a TCI state may comprise at least one DM-RS port of the transport block (or a portion of the transport block, or at least one data layer/stream of the transport block) being quasi co-located (QCL-ed) with the reference signal indicated by the TCI state. Determining a spatial domain transmission filter based on a reference signal indicated by a TCI state may comprise determining at least one DM-RS port of the transport block (or a portion of the transport block, or at least one data layer/stream of the transport block) that is QCL-ed with the reference signal indicated by the TCI state. The at least one DM-RS port of the transport block may be QCL-ed with the reference signal with respect to a quasi co-location type (e.g., QCL type D) indicated by the TCI state.

The wireless device may determine (e.g., compute, calculate) a plurality of transmission powers based on the at least two TCI states. The wireless device may determine the plurality of transmission powers for transmission of the transport block. The wireless device may perform transmission of the transport block with/using the plurality of transmission powers. The wireless device may send/transmit the transport block with/using the plurality of transmission powers (e.g., at or after time T2 in FIG. 19 and FIG. 20).

The wireless device may determine (e.g., compute, calculate) a transmission power, of the plurality of transmission powers, based on a TCI state of the at least two TCI states. The wireless device may determine each transmission power, of the plurality of transmission powers, based on a respective TCI state of the at least two TCI states. The determining the plurality of transmission powers based on the at least two TCI states may comprise determining the plurality of transmission powers, for example, based on the at least two reference signals indicated by the at least two TCI states. The wireless device may determine each transmission power, of the plurality of transmission powers, for example, based on a reference signal indicated by a respective TCI state of the at least two TCI states.

The wireless device may determine a first transmission power, of the plurality of transmission powers, for example, based on a first TCI state (e.g., TCI state 8) of the at least two TCI states. The wireless device may determine the first transmission power, for example, based on a first reference signal indicated by the first TCI state. The wireless device may send/transmit the transport block (or a first portion of the transport block, or one or more first data layers/streams of the transport block) with/using the first transmission power. The wireless device may determine a second transmission power of the plurality of transmission powers, for example, based on a second TCI state (e.g., TCI state 23) of the at least two TCI states. The wireless device may determine the second transmission power, for example, based on a second reference signal indicated by the second TCI state. The wireless device may send/transmit the transport block (or a second portion of the transport block, or one or more second data layers/streams of the transport block) with/using the second transmission power. The at least two reference signals may comprise the first reference signal and the second reference signal.

The determining (e.g., computing, calculating) the plurality of transmission powers based on the at least two reference signals may comprise determining (e.g., computing, calculating) a plurality of downlink path loss estimates (or a plurality of path loss measurements) for the plurality of transmission powers. The determining (e.g., computing, calculating) the plurality of downlink path loss estimates (or the plurality of path loss measurements) may be based on measurements (e.g., L1-RSRP, L3-RSRP, or a higher filtered RSRP measurement(s)) associated with the at least two reference signals. The wireless device may determine each downlink path loss estimate, of the plurality of downlink path loss estimates, based on a measurement(s) (e.g., L1-RSRP, L3-RSRP, or a higher filtered RSRP measurement(s)) associated with a respective reference signal of the at least two reference signals. The wireless device may use the plurality of downlink path loss estimates for determining the plurality of transmission powers for transmission of the transport block. The plurality of transmission powers may comprise the plurality of downlink path loss estimates. The wireless device may determine (e.g., calculate, compute, measure) at least two filtered RSRP values (e.g., L1-RSRP, L3-RSRP) of the at least two reference signals for the plurality of downlink path loss estimates. The wireless device may determine the at least two filtered RSRP values for transmission of the transport block.

The determining (e.g., computing, calculating) the first transmission power based on the first reference signal may comprise determining (e.g., computing, calculating) a first downlink path loss estimate (or a first path loss measurement) for the first transmission power. The first downlink path loss estimate for the first transmission power may be based on measurement(s) (e.g., L1-RSRP, L3-RSRP, or a higher filtered RSRP measurement(s)) associated with the first reference signal. The wireless device may use the first downlink path loss estimate for determining the first transmission power for transmission of the transport block (or a first portion of the transport block, or one or more first data layers/streams of the transport block). The first transmission power may comprise (e.g., be based on) the first downlink path loss estimate. The wireless device may determine (e.g., calculate, compute, measure) a first filtered RSRP (e.g., L1-RSRP, L3-RSRP) of the first reference signal for the first downlink path loss estimate. The wireless device may determine the first filtered RSRP for transmission of the transport block. The plurality of downlink path loss estimates may comprise the first downlink path loss estimate.

The determining (e.g., computing, calculating) the second transmission power based on the second reference signal may comprise determining (e.g., computing, calculating) a second downlink path loss estimate (or a second path loss measurement) for the second transmission power. The second downlink path loss estimate (or a second path loss measurement) for the second transmission power may be based on measurement(s) (e.g., L1-RSRP, L3-RSRP, or a higher filtered RSRP measurement(s)) associated with the second reference signal. The wireless device may use the second downlink path loss estimate for determining the second transmission power for transmission of the transport block (or a second portion of the transport block, or one or more second data layers/streams of the transport block). The second transmission power may comprise (e.g., be based on) the second downlink path loss estimate. The wireless device may determine (e.g., calculate, compute, measure) a second filtered RSRP (e.g., L1-RSRP, L3-RSRP) of the second reference signal for the second downlink path loss estimate. The wireless device may determine the second filtered RSRP for transmission of the transport block. The plurality of downlink path loss estimates may comprise the second downlink path loss estimate.

The wireless device may determine (e.g., compute, calculate), for transmission of the transport block, a transmission power based on a TCI state. The at least two TCI states may comprise the TCI state. The plurality of transmission powers may comprise the transmission power. The TCI state may indicate a reference signal (e.g., CSI-RS, SSB/PBCH block, SRS, DM-RS). The TCI state may comprise a reference signal indicator/index/identifier (e.g., provided by a higher layer parameter referenceSignal, ssb-index, csi-RS-Index, NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceId) identifying (e.g., indicating, of) the reference signal. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate the reference signal indicator/index/identifier for the reference signal. The wireless device may determine the transmission power based on the reference signal indicated by the TCI state. The at least two reference signals may comprise the reference signal.

The at least two reference signals indicated by the at least two TCI states may be periodic. Each reference signal of the at least two reference signals may be periodic. Each reference signal of the at least two reference signals may be periodic with a respective periodicity (e.g., 2 slots, 5 slots, 10 slots, 2 symbols, 5 symbols, etc.). The wireless device may perform measurements (e.g., L1-RSRP, L3-RSRP measurements) of the at least two reference signals periodically based on the at least two reference signals being periodic. A first reference signal of the at least two reference signals may be periodic with a first periodicity. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate the first periodicity. A second reference signal of the at least two reference signals may be periodic with a second periodicity. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate the second periodicity. The wireless device may perform measurements (e.g., L1-RSRP, L3-RSRP measurements) of the first reference signal periodically based on the first reference signal being periodic. The wireless device may perform measurements (e.g., L1-RSRP, L3-RSRP measurements) of the second reference signal periodically based on the second reference signal being periodic.

The (determined/selected) at least two TCI states may indicate one or more QCL types. Each TCI state of the at least two TCI states may indicate a respective QCL type of the one or more QCL types. A first TCI state of the at least two TCI states may indicate a first QCL type for the first reference signal. A second TCI state of the at least two TCI states may indicate a second QCL type for the second reference signal. The first QCL type may be QCL type D (or any other QCL type). The second QCL type may be QCL type D (or any other QCL type). The one or more QCL types may comprise the first QCL type and the second QCL type.

FIG. 22 shows example uplink repetition schemes for transmission (e.g., of a transport block). The repetition schemes may be based on TDM 2204, FDM 2208, or SDM 2212. For example, a transport block may be repeated across a plurality of transmission occasions in the time domain based on TDM 2204. A transport block may be repeated across a plurality of transmission occasions in the frequency domain based on FDM 2208. A transport block may be repeated across a plurality of transmission occasions in the spatial domain based on SDM 2212. Each repetition of a transport block may be sent using a corresponding spatial domain transmission filter (e.g., based on TCI state 1, TCI state 2, etc.).

The wireless device may send/transmit the transport block via (e.g., across, over, in) a plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. The wireless device may repeat the transport block via (e.g., across, over, in) the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions (e.g., as shown in FIGS. 17 and 19). The repetition of the transport block may be in a time domain (e.g., TDM 2204). The repetition of the transport block may be in a frequency domain (e.g., FDM 2208). The repetition of the transport block may be in a code/spatial domain (e.g., SDM 2212). The antenna port field may indicate, for the transport block, DM-RS port(s) within a CDM group. The wireless device may send/transmit, with/using a first spatial domain transmission filter, the transport block via (e.g., across, over, in) one or more first uplink signal/channel transmission occasions of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. The wireless device may send/transmit, with/using a second spatial domain transmission filter, the transport block via (e.g., across, over, in) one or more second uplink signal/channel transmission occasions of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. The plurality of spatial domain transmission filters may comprise the first spatial domain transmission filter and the second spatial domain transmission filter. The first spatial domain transmission filter may be based on a first TCI state (e.g., TCI state 1). The second spatial domain transmission may be based on a second TCI state (e.g., TCI state 2). The DM-RS port(s) may be QCL-ed with a first reference signal indicated by the first TCI state in the one or more first uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. The DM-RS port(s) may be QCL-ed with a second reference signal indicated by the second TCI state in the one or more second uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. The at least two TCI states may comprise the first TCI state and the second TCI state. The wireless device may send/transmit, with/using a first transmission power, the transport block via (e.g., across, over, in) the one or more first uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. The wireless device may send/transmit, with/using a second transmission power, the transport block via (e.g., across, over, in) the one or more second uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. The plurality of transmission powers may comprise the first transmission power and the second transmission power.

For example, with respect to FIG. 17, the wireless device may send a first repetition of a transport block (via a first transmission occasion 1720-1) using a first spatial domain transmission filter based on a first TCI state (TCI state 8), a second repetition of the transport block (via a second transmission occasion 1720-2) using a second spatial domain transmission filter based on a second TCI state (TCI state 23), a third repetition of the transport block (via a third transmission occasion 1720-3) using the first spatial domain transmission filter based on the first TCI state (TCI state 8), and a fourth repetition of the transport block (via a fourth transmission occasion 1720-4) using the second spatial domain transmission filter based on the second TCI state (TCI state 23). Similarly, with respect to FIG. 19, the wireless device may send a first repetition of a transport block (via a first transmission occasion 1920-1) using a first spatial domain transmission filter based on a first TCI state (TCI state 8), a second repetition of the transport block (via a second transmission occasion 1920-2) using a second spatial domain transmission filter based on a second TCI state (TCI state 23), a third repetition of the transport block (via a third transmission occasion 1920-3) using the first spatial domain transmission filter based on the first TCI state (TCI state 8), and a fourth repetition of the transport block (via a fourth transmission occasion 1920-4) using the second spatial domain transmission filter based on the second TCI state (TCI state 23).

The wireless device may send/transmit the transport block via an uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (e.g., as shown in FIGS. 18 and 20). The antenna port field may indicate DM-RS ports within at least two CDM groups. The wireless device may send/transmit, with/using a first spatial domain transmission filter, a first portion (or one or more first data layers/streams, or one or more first DM-RS ports) of the transport block via the uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. The wireless device may send/transmit, with/using a second spatial domain transmission filter, a second portion (or one or more second data layers/streams, or one or more second DM-RS ports) of the transport block via the uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. The transport block may comprise the first portion and the second portion. The transport block may comprise the one or more first data layers/streams and the one or more second data layers/streams. The plurality of spatial domain transmission filters may comprise the first spatial domain transmission filter and the second spatial domain transmission filter. One or more first DM-RS ports of the DM-RS ports of the transport block may be QCL-ed with a first reference signal, indicated by a first TCI state, in the uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. One or more second DM-RS ports of the DM-RS ports of the transport block may be QCL-ed with a second reference signal, indicated by a second TCI state, in the uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. The at least two TCI states may comprise the first TCI state and the second TCI state. The wireless device may send/transmit, with/using a first transmission power, the first portion of the transport block via the uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. The wireless device may send/transmit, with/using a second transmission power, the second portion of the transport block via the uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. The plurality of transmission powers may comprise the first transmission power and the second transmission power.

The one or more configuration parameters may indicate a plurality of TCI states (e.g., TCI state 1, TCI state 2, . . . , TCI state 128 provided by a higher layer parameter tci-StatesToAddModList in PDSCH_Config, PUSCH_Config, or PUCCH_Config, etc.). The plurality of TCI states may be for receiving (and/or decoding) a downlink transmission (e.g., a PDSCH transmission) of/for the cell. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate the plurality of TCI states for decoding a PDSCH transmission of/for the downlink BWP of the cell. The plurality of TCI states may be for transmission of an uplink signal (e.g., UCI, a PUSCH transmission, a transport block, an SR, CSI, HARQ-ACK) of/for/on/via an uplink resource (e.g., PUSCH resource, PUCCH resource, SRS resource) of the cell. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate the plurality of TCI states for transmission of the uplink signal of/for/on/via the uplink resource of the uplink BWP of the cell. The plurality of uplink resources may comprise the uplink resource.

The one or more configuration parameters may indicate TCI state indicators/indexes (e.g., provided by a higher layer parameter TCI-StateId) for the plurality of TCI states. Each TCI state of the plurality of TCI states may be identified/indicated by a respective TCI state indicator/index of the TCI state indicators/indexes. A first TCI state of the plurality of TCI states may be indicated/identified by a first TCI state indicator/index of the TCI state indicators/indexes. A second TCI state of the plurality of TCI states may be indicated/identified by a second TCI state indicator/index of the TCI state indicators/indexes.

The wireless device may receive (e.g., at or after time T1 in FIGS. 17-20) an activation command (e.g., TCI states activation/deactivation for wireless device-specific PDSCH MAC CE, TCI states activation/deactivation for wireless device-specific PUSCH MAC CE, etc.). The activation command may activate (e.g., select, indicate, or update) at least one TCI state (e.g., TCI state 5, TCI state 8, TCI state 23, TCI state 4, TCI state 11 and TCI state 1 in FIG. 21A and FIG. 21B) of the plurality of TCI states. The activation command may comprise one or more fields. The one or more fields may indicate at least one TCI state indicator/index of the at least one TCI state. The TCI state indexes may comprise the at least one TCI state index. The one or more fields may be set to a value (e.g., one) indicating activation of the at least one TCI state. The wireless device may activate the at least one TCI state, for example, based on the one or more fields, that indicate the at least one TCI state, being set to the value.

The wireless device may map the at least one TCI state to one or more TCI codepoints (e.g., 000, 001, 010, 011 as shown in FIG. 21A and FIG. 21B). The mapping the at least one TCI state to the one or more TCI codepoints may comprise grouping the at least one TCI state into/in the one or more TCI codepoints. Each TCI codepoint of the one or more TCI codepoints may comprise/indicate one or more TCI states of the at least one TCI state. For example, as shown in FIG. 21A and FIG. 21B, the at least one TCI state may comprise TCI state 5, TCI state 8, TCI state 23, TCI state 4, TCI state 11, and TCI state 1. The one or more TCI codepoints may comprise TCI codepoint 000, TCI codepoint 001, TCI codepoint 010, and TCI codepoint 011. The TCI state 5 may be mapped to the TCI codepoint 000; the TCI state 8 and the TCI state 23 may be mapped to the TCI codepoint 001; the TCI state 4 and the TCI state 11 may be mapped to the TCI codepoint 010; and the TCI state 1 may be mapped to the TCI codepoint 011. Each TCI codepoint of the one or more TCI codepoints may be indicated by a value of a TCI field in DCI. For example, the TCI field may be equal to 000 indicating the TCI codepoint 000, the TCI field may be equal to 001 indicating the TCI codepoint 001, etc. The DCI may schedule a transport block (e.g., corresponding to PDSCH transmission, or a PUSCH transmission). The TCI field in the DCI may indicate (or be equal to) a TCI codepoint of the one or more TCI codepoints. The TCI codepoint may comprise/indicate TCI state(s) of the at least one TCI state.

A TCI codepoint of the one or more TCI codepoints may indicate one or more (e.g., one or two) TCI states. For example, as shown in FIG. 21A and FIG. 21B, the TCI codepoint 000 may indicate one TCI state (e.g., TCI state 5). The TCI codepoint 011 may indicate one TCI state (e.g., TCI state 1). The TCI codepoint 001 may indicate two TCI states (e.g., TCI state 8 and TCI state 23). The TCI codepoint 010 may indicate two TCI states (e.g., TCI state 4 and TCI state 11).

A TCI codepoint (e.g., TCI codepoint 000 or TCI codepoint 011 in FIG. 21A and FIG. 21B) of the one or more TCI codepoints may comprise/indicate a single TCI state (e.g., TCI state 5 or TCI state 1). The at least one TCI state may comprise the single TCI state. The wireless device may map the single TCI state to the TCI codepoint.

A TCI codepoint (e.g., TCI codepoint 001 or TCI codepoint 010 in FIG. 21A and FIG. 21B) of the one or more TCI codepoints may comprise/indicate at least two activated TCI states (e.g., TCI state 8 and TCI state 23 in TCI codepoint 001 or TCI state 4 and TCI state 11 in TCI codepoint 010). The at least one TCI state may comprise the at least two activated TCI states. The wireless device may map the at least two activated TCI states to the TCI codepoint.

The at least one TCI state may comprise a first TCI state and a second TCI state. The wireless device may map the first TCI state (e.g., TCI state 8) and the second TCI state (e.g., TCI state 23) to a TCI codepoint (e.g., 001) of the one or more TCI codepoints. The TCI codepoint (e.g., TCI codepoint 001) may comprise/indicate at least two activated TCI states. The at least two activated TCI states may comprise the first TCI state and the second TCI state.

A TCI codepoint (e.g., TCI codepoint 001 and TCI codepoint 010) of the one or more TCI codepoints may comprise/indicate at least two activated TCI states. At least one TCI codepoint (e.g., TCI codepoint 001 and TCI codepoint 010) of the one or more TCI codepoints may comprise/indicate at least two activated TCI states. The at least one TCI state indicated (e.g., activated, updated, selected) by the activation command may comprise the at least two activated TCI states.

The at least one TCI state may be applicable to/used for a transmission (e.g., a PDSCH transmission) via the cell. The at least one TCI state may be applicable to/used for a PDSCH transmission via the active downlink BWP of the cell. The wireless device may receive DCI scheduling a PDSCH transmission for the active downlink BWP of the cell. The DCI may indicate TCI state(s), of the at least one TCI state, for reception/decoding of the PDSCH transmission. A TCI codepoint of the one or more TCI codepoints may comprise the TCI state(s). A TCI field in the DCI may indicate the TCI codepoint. The wireless device may not receive DCI (e.g., scheduling a PDSCH transmission for the active downlink BWP of the cell) that indicates a TCI state that is not among the at least one TCI state. The wireless device may receive/decode a PDSCH transmission based on the TCI state(s), of the at least one TCI state, for reception/decoding of the PDSCH transmission, for example, if DCI scheduling the PDSCH transmission for the active downlink BWP of the cell indicates the TCI state(s). The receiving/decoding the PDSCH transmission based on the TCI state(s) may comprise determining at least one DM-RS port of the PDSCH that is QCL-ed with reference signal(s) indicated by the TCI state(s) with respect to QCL type(s) (e.g., QCL type D) indicated by the TCI state(s). The receiving/decoding the PDSCH transmission based on the TCI state(s) may comprise that at least one DM-RS port of the PDSCH is QCL-ed with reference signal(s) indicated by the TCI state(s) with respect to QCL type(s) (e.g., QCL type D) indicated by the TCI state(s)

The wireless device may receive DCI scheduling a PDSCH transmission (or a TB). The wireless device may receive the DCI via a scheduling cell. The DCI may schedule the PDSCH transmission for the active downlink BWP of the cell. The DCI may indicate TCI state(s) of the at least one TCI state. The DCI may comprise a TCI field indicating the TCI state(s). The wireless device may receive/decode the PDSCH transmission, for the active downlink BWP of the cell, based on the TCI state(s), for example, based on the TCI field indicating the TCI state(s). The one or more TCI codepoints may comprise a TCI codepoint. The TCI codepoint may comprise the TCI state(s). A value of the TCI field in the DCI may be equal to a value associated with the TCI codepoint.

The at least one TCI state may be applicable to/used for an uplink transmission (e.g., a PUSCH transmission, a PUCCH transmission) via the cell. The at least one TCI state may be applicable to/used for an uplink transmission in the active uplink BWP of the cell. The wireless device may receive DCI scheduling the uplink transmission for the active uplink BWP of the cell. The DCI may indicate TCI state(s), of the at least one TCI state, for the uplink transmission. A TCI codepoint of the one or more TCI codepoints may comprise the TCI state(s). A TCI field in the DCI may indicate the TCI codepoint. The wireless device may not receive DCI, scheduling an uplink transmission for the active uplink BWP of the cell, that indicates, for the uplink transmission, a TCI state that is not among the at least one TCI state. The wireless device may perform an uplink transmission based on the TCI state(s), of the at least one TCI state, for the uplink transmission, for example, if DCI scheduling an uplink transmission for the active uplink BWP of the cell indicates the TCI state(s). The performing the uplink transmission based on the TCI state(s) may comprise determining that at least one DM-RS port of the uplink transmission that is QCL-ed with reference signal(s) indicated by the TCI state(s) with respect to QCL type(s) (e.g., QCL type D) indicated by the TCI state(s). The performing the uplink transmission based on the TCI state(s) may comprise that at least one DM-RS port of the uplink transmission is QCL-ed with reference signal(s) indicated by the TCI state(s) with respect to QCL type(s) (e.g., QCL type D) indicated by the TCI state(s).

The wireless device may receive DCI scheduling an uplink transmission (e.g., a PUSCH transmission, a PUCCH transmission, a TB). The wireless device may receive the DCI via a scheduling cell. The DCI may schedule the uplink transmission for the active uplink BWP of the cell. The DCI may indicate TCI state(s) of the at least one TCI state. The DCI may comprise a TCI field indicating the TCI state(s). The wireless device may perform the uplink transmission, for the active uplink BWP of the cell, based on the TCI state(s), for example, based on the TCI field indicating the TCI state(s). The one or more TCI codepoints may comprise a TCI codepoint. The TCI codepoint may comprise the TCI state(s). A value of the TCI field in the DCI may be equal to a value of the TCI codepoint.

The wireless device may determine that at least one TCI codepoint (e.g., TCI codepoint 001 and TCI codepoint 010) of the one or more TCI codepoints indicates (e.g., comprises, contains) at least two activated TCI states (e.g., TCI state 8 and TCI state 23 for TCI codepoint 001; TCI state 4 and TCI state 11 for TCI codepoint 010). The at least one TCI state indicated (e.g., activated, updated, or selected) by the activation command may comprise the at least two activated TCI states.

At least two activated TCI states indicated by a TCI codepoint, of the at least one TCI codepoint, may be different. For example, a TCI codepoint of the at least one TCI codepoint may indicate (e.g., comprise, contain) at least two activated TCI states. A first TCI state of the at least two activated TCI states and a second TCI state of the at least two activated TCI states may be different.

The wireless device may determine/select a selected TCI codepoint among the at least one TCI codepoint. The wireless device may determine/select the selected TCI codepoint among the at least one TCI codepoint based on the determining that the at least one TCI codepoint indicates (e.g., comprises, contains) the at least two activated TCI states.

The wireless device may determine/select the selected TCI codepoint among the at least one TCI codepoint, for example, based on the selected TCI codepoint having/being a lowest (or highest) TCI codepoint among the at least one TCI codepoint. The wireless device may determine/select the selected TCI codepoint among the at least one TCI codepoint based on the selected TCI codepoint being lowest (or highest) among the at least one TCI codepoint. For example, with respect to FIG. 21A and FIG. 21B, the at least one TCI codepoint may comprise a first TCI codepoint (TCI codepoint 001) and a second TCI codepoint (TCI codepoint 010). The wireless device may select the first TCI codepoint (TCI codepoint 001) as the selected TCI codepoint, for example, based on the first TCI codepoint (TCI codepoint 001) having/being a lower (or higher) TCI codepoint than the second TCI codepoint (TCI codepoint 010). The wireless device may select the first TCI codepoint (TCI codepoint 001) as the selected TCI codepoint, for example, based on the first TCI codepoint (TCI codepoint 001) being lower (or higher) than the second TCI codepoint (TCI codepoint 010).

The at least one TCI codepoint may indicate/comprise a second plurality of TCI states (e.g., TCI state 8, TCI state 23, TCI state 4, TCI state 11). The wireless device may determine/select the selected TCI codepoint among the at least one TCI codepoint, for example, based on the selected TCI codepoint comprising/indicating a TCI state with a lowest (or highest) TCI state indicator/index among a second plurality of TCI state indicators/indexes of the second plurality of TCI states. The at least one TCI state indicated (e.g., selected, activated, or updated) by the activation command may comprise the second plurality of TCI states. The at least one TCI state indicator/index of the at least one TCI state may comprise the second plurality of TCI state indicators/indexes. For example, with respect to FIG. 21A and FIG. 21B, the at least one TCI codepoint may comprise a first TCI codepoint (TCI codepoint 001) and a second TCI codepoint (TCI codepoint 010). The second plurality of TCI states may comprise TCI state 8, TCI state 23, TCI state 4, and TCI state 11. The wireless device may select the first TCI codepoint (TCI codepoint 001) as the selected TCI codepoint, for example, based on a first TCI state indicator/index of the TCI state 8 in the first TCI codepoint (TCI codepoint 001) being lower (or higher) than a second TCI state indicator/index of the TCI state 4 and a third TCI state indicator/index of the TCI state 11 in the second TCI codepoint (TCI codepoint 010). The wireless device may select the second TCI codepoint (TCI codepoint 010) as the selected TCI codepoint, for example, based on a third TCI state indicator/index of the TCI state 11 in the second TCI codepoint (TCI codepoint 010) being lower (or higher) than a first TCI state indicator/index of the TCI state 8 and a second TCI state indicator/index of the TCI state 23 in the first TCI codepoint (TCI codepoint 001).

The selected TCI codepoint may indicate at least two activated TCI states. With respect to FIG. 21A and FIG. 21B, the at least two activated TCI states may be TCI state 8 and TCI state 23, for example, if the selected TCI codepoint is TCI codepoint 001. The at least two activated TCI states may be TCI state 4 and TCI state 11, for example, if the selected TCI codepoint is TCI codepoint 010.

The at least two activated TCI states indicated by the selected TCI codepoint may comprise a first TCI state and a second TCI state. The first TCI state of the at least two activated TCI states may be a first element/member in a set/vector comprising the at least two activated TCI states. The second TCI state of the at least two activated TCI states may be a second element/member in a set/vector comprising the at least two activated TCI states. The first TCI state may be TCI state 8 and the second TCI state may be TCI state 23, for example, if the at least two activated TCI states comprise TCI state 8 and TCI state 23. The first TCI state may be TCI state 4 and the second TCI state may be TCI state 11, for example, if the at least two activated TCI states comprise TCI state 4 and TCI state 11.

The wireless device may determine/select the at least two TCI states for transmission of the transport block based on the selected TCI codepoint. The (determined/selected) at least two TCI states may be the at least two activated TCI states indicated by the selected TCI codepoint. With respect to FIG. 21A, the (determined/selected) at least two TCI states may be TCI state 8 and TCI state 23, for example, if the selected TCI codepoint is TCI codepoint 001. The (determined/selected) at least two TCI states may be TCI state 4 and TCI state 11, for example, if the selected TCI codepoint is TCI codepoint 010.

Spatial settings for transmission of the transport block may be same as spatial settings for PDSCH receptions in the at least two activated TCI states. The at least two activated TCI states may correspond to (or may be indicated by) the lowest TCI codepoint (or may correspond to the selected TCI codepoint) among the one or more TCI codepoints containing/comprising two different TCI states (e.g., the at least two activated TCI states) on the active downlink BWP of the cell. Spatial settings for transmission of the transport block may be same as spatial settings for PUSCH transmissions in the at least two activated TCI states. The at least two activated TCI states may correspond to (or may be indicated by) the lowest TCI codepoint (or may correspond to the selected TCI codepoint) among the one or more TCI codepoints containing/comprising two different TCI states (e.g., the at least two activated TCI states) on the active uplink BWP of the cell.

The wireless device may determine/calculate the plurality of transmission powers. The wireless device may, to determine/calculate the plurality of transmission powers, determine at least two RS resource indicators/indexes providing at least two RS resources (e.g., with QCL type D) in the at least two activated TCI states. The at least two activated TCI states may correspond to (or may be indicated by) the lowest TCI codepoint (or may correspond to the selected TCI codepoint) among the one or more TCI codepoints containing two different TCI states (e.g., the at least two activated TCI states) on the active downlink BWP of the cell.

The wireless device may determine/select the at least two TCI states for transmission of the transport block. The wireless device may determine/select the at least two TCI states based on the selected TCI codepoint and the first CORESET. The wireless device may determine/select a first TCI state, of the at least two TCI states, based on the first TCI state of a first CORESET (e.g., TCI state 8 of first CORESET in FIG. 21B). The first CORESET may be identified/indicated by a CORESET indicator/index that is lowest among the one or more CORESET indicators/indexes of the one or more CORESETs. The first TCI state of the at least two TCI states may be the first TCI state of the first CORESET identified/indicated by the CORESET indicators/index that is lowest among the one or more CORESET indicators/indexes of the one or more CORESETs. The wireless device may determine/select a second TCI state, of the at least two TCI states, based on the second TCI state of the at least two activated TCI states indicated by the selected TCI codepoint. The second TCI state, of the at least two TCI states, may be the second TCI state of the at least two activated TCI states indicated by the selected TCI codepoint (e.g., TCI state 23 in TCI codepoint 001 of FIG. 21B). The second TCI state, of the at least two activated TCI states indicated by the selected TCI codepoint, for example, may be a second element/member in a set/vector comprising the at least two activated TCI states indicated by the selected TCI codepoint.

A first spatial setting for transmission (e.g., of the transport block) may be the same as a spatial setting for reception (e.g., PDCCH receptions) via the first CORESET with the lowest CORESET indicator/index. A second spatial setting for transmission (e.g., of the transport block) may be the same as a spatial setting for reception (e.g., PDSCH receptions) based on a second TCI state corresponding to the lowest TCI codepoint (or corresponding to the selected TCI codepoint) among the one or more TCI codepoints. The one or more TCI codepoints may comprise/contain two different TCI states (e.g., the at least two activated TCI states) on the active downlink BWP of the cell.

A first spatial setting for transmission (e.g., of the transport block) may be the same as a spatial setting for transmission (e.g., PDCCH transmissions) via the first CORESET with the lowest CORESET indicator/index. A second spatial setting for transmission (e.g., of the transport block) may be the same as a spatial setting for reception (e.g., PUSCH receptions) based on a second TCI state corresponding to the lowest TCI codepoint (or corresponding to the selected TCI codepoint) among the one or more TCI codepoints. The one or more TCI codepoints may comprise/contain two different TCI states (e.g., the at least two activated TCI states) on the active uplink BWP of the cell.

The wireless device may determine the plurality of transmission powers. The wireless device may, to determine the plurality of transmission powers, determine a first RS resource indicator/index providing a first RS resource (e.g., with QCL type D) in the first TCI state (or QCL assumption) of the first CORESET (e.g., with the lowest CORESET index/indicator). The wireless device may, to determine the plurality of transmission powers, determine a second RS resource indicator/index providing a second RS resource (e.g., with QCL type D) in the second TCI state corresponding to the lowest TCI codepoint (or corresponding to the selected TCI codepoint) among the one or more TCI codepoints. The one or more TCI codepoints may comprise/contain two different TCI states (e.g., the at least two activated TCI states) on the active downlink BWP of the cell.

A quantity of the one or more CORESETs may be greater than or equal to two. The wireless device may select/determine at least two CORESETs among the one or more CORESETs. The at least two CORESETs (e.g., first CORESET and second CORESET in FIG. 21C) may be identified/indicated by at least two CORESET indicators/indexes of the one or more CORESET indicators/indexes. Each CORESET of the at least two CORESETs may be identified/indicated by a respective CORESET indicator/index of the at least two CORESET indicator/sindexes. The at least two CORESET indexes may be lowest (or highest) two CORESET indexes among the one or more CORESET indexes. The at least two CORESETs may be identified/indicated by the at least two CORESET indexes that are lowest (or highest) among the one or more CORESET indexes of the one or more CORESETs. The at least two CORESETs may be identified/indicated by at least two lowest (or highest) CORESET indexes among the one or more CORESET indexes of the one or more CORESETs. The selecting/determining the at least two CORESETs may comprise selecting/determining at least two CORESETs identified/indicated with at least two CORESET indexes that are lowest among the one or more CORESET indexes of the one or more CORESETs. The selecting/determining the at least two CORESETs may comprise selecting/determining at least two CORESETs identified/indicated with at least two lowest CORESET indexes among the one or more CORESET indexes of the one or more CORESETs. The wireless device may select/determine the at least two CORESETs among the one or more CORESETs, for example, based on the at least two CORESET indexes of the at least two CORESETs being lowest (or highest) among the one or more CORESET indexes of the one or more CORESETs. A quantity of the at least two CORESETs may be two (or any other quantity greater than two). The one or more CORESETs may comprise a first CORESET, a second CORESET, a third CORESET and a fourth CORESET. The one or more CORESET indexes may comprise a first CORESET index of the first CORESET, a second CORESET index of the second CORESET, a third CORESET index of the third CORESET and a fourth CORESET index of the fourth CORESET. The first CORESET index may be lowest (or highest) among the first CORESET index, the second CORESET index, the third CORESET index, and the fourth CORESET index. The second CORESET index may be lower (or higher) than the third CORESET index and the fourth CORESET index. The wireless device may select/determine the first CORESET and the second CORESET as the at least two CORESETs, for example, based on the first CORESET index and the second CORESET index being lowest (or highest) two CORESET indexes among the first CORESET index, the second CORESET index, the third CORESET index, and the fourth CORESET index.

The wireless device may monitor downlink control channels, for DCI, in the at least two CORESETs based on at least two activated TCI states (e.g., TCI state 8 of first CORESET and TCI state 23 of second CORESET as shown in FIG. 21C). The wireless device may monitor downlink control channels, for DCI, in each CORESET of the at least two CORESETs, for example, based on a respective TCI state of the at least two activated TCI states. The monitoring the downlink control channels, for the DCI, in the at least two CORESETs based on at least two activated TCI states may comprise DM-RS antenna ports of the downlink control channels (e.g., PDCCH) in the at least two CORESETs being quasi co-located with at least two reference signals indicated by the at least two activated TCI states. A respective DM-RS antenna port, of the DM-RS antenna ports in (or associated with) each CORESET of the at least two CORESETs, may be quasi co-located with a reference signal, of the at least two reference signals, indicated by a respective TCI state of the at least two activated TCI states. The wireless device may monitor downlink control channels, for DCI, in a first CORESET (e.g., first CORESET in FIG. 21C), of the at least two CORESETs, based on a first TCI state (e.g., TCI state 8 in FIG. 21C) of the at least two activated TCI states. The monitoring the downlink control channels in the first CORESET based on the first TCI state may comprise one or more DM-RS antenna ports of the downlink control channels (e.g., PDCCH) in the first CORESET being quasi co-located with a first reference signal indicated by the first TCI state. The one or more DM-RS antenna ports may be quasi co-located with the first reference signal with respect to a first quasi co-location type indicated by the first TCI state. The wireless device may monitor downlink control channels, for DCI, in a second CORESET (e.g., second CORESET in FIG. 21C), of the at least two CORESETs, based on a second TCI state (e.g., TCI state 23 in FIG. 21C) of the at least two activated TCI states. The monitoring the downlink control channels in the second CORESET based on the second TCI state may comprise one or more DM-RS antenna ports of the downlink control channels (e.g., PDCCH) in the second CORESET being quasi co-located with a second reference signal indicated by the second TCI state. The one or more DM-RS antenna ports may be quasi co-located with the second reference signal with respect to a second quasi co-location type indicated by the second TCI state. The at least two reference signals may comprise the first reference signal and the second reference signal.

The one or more configuration parameters may indicate the at least two activated TCI states (e.g., provided by a higher layer parameter tci-StatesPDCCH-ToAddList) for the at least two CORESETs. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate each TCI state, of the at least two activated TCI states, for a respective CORESET of the at least two CORESETs. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate the first TCI state for the first CORESET. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate the second TCI state for the second CORESET.

The wireless device may receive (e.g., at or after time T1 in FIGS. 17-20) one or more activation commands (e.g., TCI state indication for wireless device-specific PDCCH MAC CE) activating (e.g., selecting, indicating, or updating) the at least two activated TCI states for the at least two CORESETs. Each activation command of the one or more activation commands may activate (e.g., select, indicate, update) a respective TCI state, of the at least two activated TCI states, for a CORESET of the at least two CORESETs. A first activation command of the one or more activation commands may activate the first TCI state for the first CORESET. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate a plurality of TCI states (e.g., provided by a higher layer parameter tci-StatesPDCCH-ToAddList) for the first CORESET. The first activation command may activate the first TCI state, among the plurality of TCI states, for the first CORESET. A second activation command of the one or more activation commands may activate the second TCI state for the second CORESET. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate a plurality of TCI states (e.g., provided by a higher layer parameter tci-StatesPDCCH-ToAddList) for the second CORESET. The second activation command may activate the second TCI state, among the plurality of TCI states, for the second CORESET. The first activation command and the second activation command may or may not be the same. The wireless device may receive the first activation command and the second activation command at the same time (e.g., simultaneously) or at different times.

The wireless device may determine/select the at least two TCI states for transmission of the transport block, for example, based on the at least two CORESETs. The (determined/selected) at least two TCI states may be the at least two activated TCI states indicated by the at least two CORESETs. The (determined/selected) at least two TCI states may be the at least two activated TCI states of the at least two CORESETs. The (determined/selected) at least two TCI states may be the at least two activated TCI states activated (e.g., indicated, updated, or selected), by the one or more activation commands, for the at least two CORESETs. The (determined/selected) at least two TCI states may be the at least two activated TCI states indicated, by the one or more configuration parameters, for the at least two CORESETs. The (determined/selected) at least two TCI states may be the at least two activated TCI states used for monitoring downlink control channels in the at least two CORESETs. As shown in FIG. 21C, the (determined/selected) at least two TCI states may be TCI state 8 and TCI state 23, for example, if the at least two CORESETs are the first CORESET and the second CORESET.

Spatial settings for transmission of the transport block may be same as spatial settings for reception (e.g., PDCCH receptions) via at least two CORESETs. Spatial settings for transmission of the transport block may be same as spatial settings for reception (e.g., PDCCH receptions) via the at least two CORESETs with the lowest (or highest) two CORESET indicators/indexes on the active downlink BWP of the cell.

A first spatial setting may be a first TCI state. A second spatial setting may be a second TCI state. The spatial settings may comprise a first spatial setting and a second spatial setting.

The wireless device may determine the plurality of transmission powers. The wireless device may, to determine the plurality of transmission powers, determine at least two RS resource indicators/indexes providing RS resources (e.g., with QCL type D) in the at least two activated TCI states (or the at least two QCL assumptions) of the at least two CORESETs (e.g., with the lowest (or highest) two CORESET indexes in the active downlink BWP of the cell).

The quantity of repetitions may be for repetitions of the transport block via an uplink resource (e.g., PUCCH resource, SRS resource, PUSCH resource). The quantity of repetitions may indicate a plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions (e.g., PUSCH transmission occasions, PUCCH transmission occasions) for transmission/repetition of the transport block. A quantity of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions may be equal to the quantity of repetitions.

The wireless device may send/transmit (e.g., at or after time T2 in FIG. 17), with/using the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, the transport block via (e.g., across, over, in) the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. The wireless device may transmit the transport block across the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions with/using the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters. The wireless device may transmit, with/using each spatial domain transmission filter of the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, the transport block via a respective uplink signal/channel transmission occasion(s) of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. The wireless device may transmit, with/using a respective spatial domain transmission filter of the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, the transport block in each uplink signal/channel transmission occasion of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions.

The wireless device may send/transmit (e.g., at or after time T2 in FIG. 19), with/using the plurality of transmission powers, the transport block via (e.g., across, over, in) the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. The wireless device may transmit the transport block across the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions with/using the plurality of transmission powers. The wireless device may transmit, with/using each transmission power of the plurality of transmission powers, the transport block via respective uplink signal/channel transmission occasion(s) of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. The wireless device may transmit, with/using a respective transmission power of the plurality of transmission powers, the transport block in each uplink signal/channel transmission occasion of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions.

The repetitions of the transport block may be/occur in time units (e.g. TDM-ed). The time units may or may not be consecutive and/or contiguous. A quantity of the time units may be equal to the quantity of repetitions. The time units may be time slots, mini-slots, time symbols (e.g., OFDM submols), or sub-frames, etc. The plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions may be/occur in the time units. For example, a first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion, of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions, may be/occur in a first time unit of the time units; a second uplink signal/channel transmission occasion, of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions, may be/occur in a second time unit of the time units, etc.

The repetitions of the transport block may be/occur in frequency units (FDM-ed). The frequency units may or may not be consecutive and/or contiguous. A quantity of the frequency units may be equal to the quantity of repetitions. The frequency units may be frequency bands, physical resource blocks (PRBs), BWPs, cells, etc. The plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions may be/occur in the frequency units. For example, a first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion, of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions, may be/occur in a first frequency unit of the frequency units; a second uplink signal/channel transmission occasion, of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions, may be/occur in a second frequency unit of the frequency units, and so on.

The wireless device may repeat transmission of the transport block across (e.g., over, in) the time units. The wireless device may repeat transmission of the transport block across (e.g., over, in) the frequency units. The wireless device may repeat transmission of the transport block across (e.g., over, in) the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. The wireless device may send/transmit the transport block based on (e.g., with, using) the quantity of repetitions. For example, in FIG. 17 and FIG. 19, the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions may comprise a first signal/channel transmission occasion (e.g., 1st TX occasion 1720-1 or 1920-1), a second signal/channel transmission occasion (e.g., 2nd TX occasion 1720-2 or 1920-2), a third signal/channel transmission occasion (e.g., 3rd TX occasion 1720-3 or 1920-3), and a fourth signal/channel transmission occasion (e.g., 4th TX occasion 1720-4 or 1920-4). The first signal/channel transmission occasion may be/occur in a first time unit of the time units (e.g., 1st time slot). The second signal/channel transmission occasion may be/occur in a second time unit of the time units (e.g., 2nd time slot). The third signal/channel transmission occasion may be/occur in a third time unit of the time units (e.g., 3rd time slot). The fourth signal/channel transmission occasion may be/occur in a fourth time unit of the time units (e.g., 4th time slot). The first signal/channel transmission occasion may be/occur in a first frequency unit of the frequency units (e.g., 1st PRB). The second signal/channel transmission occasion may be/occur in a second frequency unit of the frequency units (e.g., 2nd PRB). The third signal/channel transmission occasion may be/occur in a third frequency unit of the frequency units (e.g., 3rd PRB). The fourth signal/channel transmission occasion may be/occur in a fourth frequency unit of the frequency units (e.g., 4th PRB).

The one or more configuration parameters may indicate a repetition scheme (e.g., FDM-Scheme, TDM-Scheme, SDM-Scheme, CDM-Scheme). The repetition scheme may be for repetitions of transmission of a transport block (e.g., PUSCH transmission, PDSCH transmission) via an uplink resource (e.g., PUCCH resource, SRS resource, PUSCH resource). The repetition scheme may be used for a downlink transmission (e.g., a PDSCH repetition).

The wireless device may send/transmit, with/using the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, the transport block. The wireless device may send/transmit, with/using the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, the transport block via (e.g., across, over, in) the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions, for example, based on the one or more configuration parameters indicating the repetition scheme. The antenna port field may indicate, for the transport block, DM-RS port(s) within a CDM group.

The wireless device may send/transmit, with/using the plurality of transmission powers, the transport block. The wireless device may send/transmit, with/using the plurality of transmission powers, the transport block via (e.g., across, over, in) the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions, for example, based on the one or more configuration parameters indicating the repetition scheme. The antenna port field may indicate, for the transport block, DM-RS port(s) within a CDM group.

The repetition scheme may be a time domain repetition scheme (e.g., TDM scheme, TDMSchemeA, TDMSchemeB, etc.). The plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions (e.g., 1st TX occasion, 2nd TX occasion, 3rd TX occasion, and 4th TX occasion) may not overlap in time in the time domain repetition scheme. The plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions may or may not overlap in frequency in the time domain repetition scheme. Each uplink signal/channel transmission occasion, of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions, may have a non-overlapping time domain resource allocation with respect to other signal/channel transmission occasion(s) of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. A first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion, of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions, may not overlap, in time, with a second signal/channel transmission occasion of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. The first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion and the second uplink signal/channel transmission occasion may be different. In the time domain repetition scheme (e.g., TDM 2204 as shown in FIG. 22), the first signal/channel transmission occasion (1st TX occasion), the second signal/channel transmission occasion (e.g., 2nd TX occasion), the third signal/channel transmission occasion (e.g., 3rd TX occasion), and the fourth signal/channel transmission occasion (e.g., 4th TX occasion) may not overlap in time. The wireless device may send/transmit the transport block based on a respective spatial domain transmission filter, of the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, via respective uplink signal/channel transmission occasion(s) of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. The wireless device may transmit the transport block using a respective transmission power, of the plurality of transmission powers, via respective uplink signal/channel transmission occasion(s) of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. The respective uplink signal/channel transmission occasion(s) may have non-overlapping time domain resource allocation with respect to another uplink signal/channel transmission occasion of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. The plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions may occur in different time units. The first time unit, the second time unit, the third time unit, and the fourth time unit may not overlap in time. The first time unit, the second time unit, the third time unit, and the fourth time unit may be different. The wireless device may transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, the transport block via (e.g., across, over, in) the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions, for example, based on the one or more configuration parameters indicating the time domain repetition scheme. The wireless device may transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) the plurality of transmission powers, the transport block via (e.g., across, over, in) the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions, for example, based on the one or more configuration parameters indicating the time domain repetition scheme.

The repetition scheme may be a frequency domain repetition scheme (e.g., FDM scheme, FDMSchemeA, FDMSchemeB, etc.). The plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions may or may not overlap in time in the frequency domain repetition scheme. The plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions may not overlap in frequency in the frequency domain repetition scheme. Each uplink signal/channel transmission occasion, of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions, may have a non-overlapping frequency domain resource allocation with respect to other signal/channel transmission occasion(s) of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. A first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions may not overlap, in frequency, with a second signal/channel transmission occasion of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. The first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion and the second uplink signal/channel transmission occasion may be different. In the frequency domain repetition scheme (e.g., FDM 2208 as shown in FIG. 22), the first signal/channel transmission occasion (1st TX occasion) and the second signal/channel transmission occasion (e.g., 2nd TX occasion) may not overlap in frequency. The first signal/channel transmission occasion (1st TX occasion) and the second signal/channel transmission occasion (e.g., 2nd TX occasion) may or may not overlap in time. The wireless device may send/transmit the transport block based on a respective spatial domain transmission filter, of the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, via respective uplink signal/channel transmission occasion(s) of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. The wireless device may transmit the transport block based on a transmission power, of the plurality of transmission powers, via respective uplink signal/channel transmission occasion(s) of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. The respective uplink signal/channel transmission occasion(s) may have non-overlapping frequency domain resource allocation with respect to another uplink signal/channel transmission occasion of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. The plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions may occur in different frequency units (e.g., frequencies, PRBs, frequency bands, bandwidth parts, cells). A first frequency unit of the first signal/channel transmission occasion and a second frequency unit of the second signal/channel transmission occasion may not overlap in frequency. The first frequency unit and the second frequency unit may be different. The wireless device may transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, the transport block via (e.g., across, over, in) the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions, for example, based on the one or more configuration parameters indicating the frequency domain repetition scheme. The wireless device may transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) the plurality of transmission powers, the transport block via (e.g., across, over, in) the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions, for example, based on the one or more configuration parameters indicating the frequency domain repetition scheme.

The repetition scheme may be a spatial/code domain repetition scheme (e.g., SDM scheme, CDM scheme, SDMScheme, CDMScheme, etc.). The plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions may or may not overlap in time in the spatial/code domain repetition scheme. The plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions may or may not overlap in frequency in the spatial/code domain repetition scheme. The plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions may be an uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (e.g., a single uplink signal/channel transmission occasion) in the spatial/code domain repetition scheme. Each uplink signal/channel transmission occasion, of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions, may have an overlapping frequency domain resource allocation with respect to other signal/channel transmission occasion(s) of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. Each uplink signal/channel transmission occasion, of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions, may have an overlapping time domain resource allocation with respect to other signal/channel transmission occasion(s) of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. A first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion, of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions, may overlap, in time and/or frequency, with a second signal/channel transmission occasion of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. The first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion and the second uplink signal/channel transmission occasion may be the same. In the spatial/code domain repetition scheme (e.g., SDM 2212 as shown in FIG. 22), the first signal/channel transmission occasion (1st TX occasion) and the second signal/channel transmission occasion (e.g., 2nd TX occasion) may overlap in frequency. The first signal/channel transmission occasion (1st TX occasion) and the second signal/channel transmission occasion (e.g., 2nd TX occasion) may overlap in time.

The wireless device may send/transmit the transport block based on a respective spatial domain transmission filter, of the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, via/in the respective uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. The antenna port field may indicate DM-RS port(s) within a CDM group. The wireless device may transmit the transport block based on a respective transmission power, of the plurality of transmission powers, via/in the respective uplink signal/channel transmission occasion.

The plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions may occur in same frequency units (e.g., frequencies, PRBs, frequency bands, bandwidth parts, cells) in the spatial/code domain repetition scheme. A first frequency unit, of the first signal/channel transmission occasion, and a second frequency unit, of the second signal/channel transmission occasion, may overlap in frequency. The plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions may occur in same time units (e.g., symbols, mini-slots, slots, sub-frames, etc.). A first time unit, of the first signal/channel transmission occasion, and a second time unit, of the second signal/channel transmission occasion, may overlap in time. The wireless device may transmit, via the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions, the transport block based on (e.g., with, using) different spatial domain transmission filters.

The antenna port field may indicate DM-RS port(s) within a CDM group. The wireless device may send/transmit the transport block based on (e.g., with) a first spatial domain transmission filter via the first signal/channel transmission occasion and based on (e.g., with) a second spatial domain transmission filter via the second signal/channel transmission occasion. The first spatial domain transmission filter may be different from the second spatial domain transmission filter.

The antenna port field may indicate DM-RS ports within at least two CDM groups. With respect to FIG. 18, the wireless device may send/transmit a first portion (or one or more first data layers/streams) of the transport block 1824-1 based on (e.g., with) a first spatial domain transmission filter via the first signal/channel transmission occasion 1820-1. The wireless device may send/transmit a second portion (or one or more second data layers/streams) of the transport block 1824-2 based on (e.g., with) a second spatial domain transmission filter via the second signal/channel transmission occasion 1820-2. The transport block may comprise the first portion 1824-1 and the second portion 1824-2. The transport block may comprise the one or more first data layers/streams and the one or more second data layers/streams. The first spatial domain transmission filter may be different from the second spatial domain transmission filter.

The plurality of spatial domain transmission filters may comprise the first spatial domain transmission filter and the second spatial domain transmission filter. The wireless device may send/transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, the transport block via (e.g., across, over, in) the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions, for example, based on the one or more configuration parameters indicating the spatial/code domain repetition scheme.

The wireless device may send/transmit, via the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions, the transport block based on (e.g., with/using) different transmission powers. The antenna port field may indicate DM-RS port(s) within a CDM group. The wireless device may send/transmit the transport block based on a first transmission power via the first signal/channel transmission occasion and based on a second transmission power via the second signal/channel transmission occasion. The first transmission power may be different from the second transmission power.

The antenna port field may indicate DM-RS ports within at least two CDM groups. With respect to FIG. 20, the wireless device may send/transmit a first portion (or one or more first data layers/streams) of the transport block 2024-1 based on (e.g., with/using) a first transmission power via the first signal/channel transmission occasion. The wireless device may send/transmit a second portion (or one or more second data layers/streams) of the transport block 2024-2 based on (e.g., with/using) a second transmission power via the second signal/channel transmission occasion. The transport block may comprise the first portion 2024-1 and the second portion 2024-2. The transport block may comprise the one or more first data layers/streams and the one or more second data layers/streams. The first transmission power may be different from the second transmission power.

The plurality of transmission powers may comprise the first transmission power and the second transmission power. The wireless device may send/transmit, based on (e.g., with/using the plurality of transmission powers), the transport block via (e.g., across, over, in) the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions, for example, based on the one or more configuration parameters indicating the spatial/code domain repetition scheme.

A spatial domain transmission filter may be a transmitting beam. The wireless device may send/transmit (e.g., as shown in FIG. 17), based on (e.g., with/using) the first spatial domain transmission filter (TCI state 8), the transport block via (e.g., across, over, in) one or more first uplink signal/channel transmission occasions (e.g., 1^(st) TX occasion 1720-1 and 3^(rd) TX occasion 1720-3) of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. The wireless device may send/transmit the transport block via (e.g., across, over, in) the one or more first uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. The wireless device may send/transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) the second spatial domain transmission filter (TCI state 23), the transport block via (e.g., across, over, in) one or more second uplink signal/channel transmission occasions (e.g., 2^(nd) TX occasion 1720-2 and 4^(th) TX occasion 1720-4) of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions.

The wireless device may send/transmit (e.g., as shown in FIG. 18), based on (e.g., with/using) the first spatial domain transmission filter (TCI state 8), the first portion of the transport block 1824-1 via the first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion 1820-1. The wireless device may send/transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) the second spatial domain transmission filter (TCI state 23), the second portion of the transport block 1824-2 via the second uplink signal/channel transmission occasion 1820-2. The first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion 1820-1 and the second uplink signal/channel transmission occasion 1820-2 may be the same. The first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion 1820-1 and the second uplink signal/channel transmission occasion 1820-2 may be the uplink signal/channel transmission occasion.

The wireless device may send/transmit (e.g., as shown in FIG. 19), based on (e.g., with/using) the first transmission power (TCI state 8), the transport block via (e.g., across, over, in) the one or more first uplink signal/channel transmission occasions (e.g., 1^(st) TX occasion 1920-1 and 3^(rd) TX occasion 1920-3) of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. The wireless device may send/transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) the second transmission power (TCI state 23), the transport block via (e.g., across, over, in) the one or more second uplink signal/channel transmission occasions (e.g., 2^(nd) TX occasion 1920-2 and 4^(th) TX occasion 1920-4) of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. The one or more first uplink signal/channel transmission occasions may comprise the first signal/channel transmission occasion (1st TX occasion 1920-1) and the third signal/channel transmission occasion (3rd TX occasion 1920-3). The one or more second uplink signal/channel transmission occasions may comprise the second signal/channel transmission occasion (2nd TX occasion 1920-2) and the fourth signal/channel transmission occasion (4th TX occasion 1920-4).

The wireless device may send/transmit (e.g., as shown in FIG. 20), based on (e.g., with/using) the first transmission power (TCI state 8), the first portion of the transport block 2024-1 via the first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion 2020-1. The wireless device may send/transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) the second transmission power (TCI state 23), the second portion of the transport block 2024-2 via the second uplink signal/channel transmission occasion 2020-2. The first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion 2020-1 and the second uplink signal/channel transmission occasion 2020-2 may be the same. The first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion 2020-1 and the second uplink signal/channel transmission occasion 2020-2 may be the uplink signal/channel transmission occasion.

The plurality of spatial domain transmission filters may comprise a first spatial domain transmission filter and a second spatial domain transmission filter. The plurality of transmission powers may comprise a first transmission power and a second transmission power.

The quantity of repetitions may be two (or any other quantity). The plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions may comprise a first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (1st TX occasion) and a second uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (2nd TX occasion). The wireless device may send/transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) the first spatial domain transmission filter, the transport block via the first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. The wireless device may apply the first spatial domain transmission filter to the first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. The wireless device may send/transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) the second spatial domain transmission filter, the transport block via the second uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. The wireless device may apply the second spatial domain transmission filter to the second uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. The wireless device may transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) the first transmission power, the transport block via the first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. The wireless device may apply the first transmission power to the first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. The wireless device may transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) the second transmission power, the transport block via the second uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. The wireless device may apply the second transmission power to the second uplink signal/channel transmission occasion.

The quantity of repetitions may be greater than two. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate a cyclic mapping. The cyclic mapping may enable mapping of the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters to the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. The wireless device may switch spatial domain transmission filters cyclically based on the cyclic mapping. The wireless device may send/transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) the first spatial domain transmission filter, a transport block via a first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (1st TX occasion) of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. The wireless device may apply the first spatial domain transmission filter to the first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. The wireless device may send/transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) the second spatial domain transmission filter, the transport block via a second uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (2nd TX occasion) of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. The wireless device may apply the second spatial domain transmission filter to the second uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. The same spatial domain transmission filter mapping pattern may continue for remaining uplink signal/channel transmission occasion(s) of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions based on the one or more configuration parameters indicating the cyclic mapping. The remaining uplink signal/channel transmission occasion(s) may not comprise the first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion and the second uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. The plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions may comprise a first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion, a second uplink signal/channel transmission occasion, a third uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (3rd TX occasion), and a fourth uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (4th TX occasion), for example, if the quantity of repetitions is equal to four. The wireless device may send/transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) the first spatial domain transmission filter, a transport block (e.g., repetitions of the transport block) via the first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion and the third uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. The wireless device may send/transmit, based on the second spatial domain transmission filter, the transport block (e.g., repetitions of the transport block) via the second uplink signal/channel transmission occasion and the fourth uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. The plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions may comprise a first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (1st TX occasion), a second uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (2nd TX occasion), a third uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (3rd TX occasion), a fourth uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (4th TX occasion), a fifth uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (5th TX occasion), a sixth uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (6th TX occasion), a seventh uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (7th TX occasion), and an eighth uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (8th TX occasion), for example, if the quantity of repetitions is equal to eight. The wireless device may send/transmit, based on the first spatial domain transmission filter, a transport block (e.g., repetitions of the transport block) via the first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion, the third uplink signal/channel transmission occasion, the fifth uplink signal/channel transmission occasion, and the seventh uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. The wireless device may send/transmit, based on the second spatial domain transmission filter, the transport block (e.g., repetitions of the transport block) via the second uplink signal/channel transmission occasion, the fourth uplink signal/channel transmission occasion, the sixth uplink signal/channel transmission occasion, and the eighth uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. FIG. 17 shows an example of cyclic mapping (e.g., based on TCI state 8, TCI state 23, TCI state 8, TCI state 23). The wireless device may send, based on TCI state 8, a transport block (e.g., repetitions of the transport block) via the first TX occasion 1720-1 and the third TX occasion 1720-3. The wireless device may send, based on TCI state 23, the transport block (e.g., repetitions of the transport block) via the second TX occasion 1720-2 and the fourth TX occasion 1720-4.

The quantity of repetitions may be greater than two. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate a sequential mapping. The sequential mapping may enable mapping of the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters to the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. The wireless device may switch spatial domain transmission filters sequentially based on the sequential mapping. The wireless device may send/transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) the first spatial domain transmission filter, a transport block (e.g., repetitions of the transport block) via a first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (1st TX occasion) of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions and a second uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (2nd TX occasion) of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. The wireless device may apply the first spatial domain transmission filter to the first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion and the second uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. The wireless device may send/transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) the second spatial domain transmission filter, the transport block (e.g., repetitions of the transport block) via a third uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (3rd TX occasion) of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions and a fourth uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (4th TX occasion) of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. The wireless device may apply the second spatial domain transmission filter to the third uplink signal/channel transmission occasion and the fourth uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. The same spatial domain transmission filter mapping pattern may continue for remaining uplink signal/channel transmission occasion(s) of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions based on the one or more configuration parameters indicating the sequential mapping. The remaining uplink signal/channel transmission occasion(s) may not comprise the first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion, the second uplink signal/channel transmission occasion, the third uplink signal/channel transmission occasion, and the fourth uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. The plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions may comprise a first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion, a second uplink signal/channel transmission occasion, a third uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (3rd TX occasion), and a fourth uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (4th TX occasion), for example, if the quantity of repetitions is equal to four. The wireless device may send/transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) the first spatial domain transmission filter, a transport block (e.g., repetitions of the transport block) via the first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion and the second uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. The wireless device may send/transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) the second spatial domain transmission filter, the transport block (e.g., repetitions of the transport block) via the third uplink signal/channel transmission occasion and the fourth uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. The plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions may comprise a first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (1st TX occasion), a second uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (2nd TX occasion), a third uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (3rd TX occasion), a fourth uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (4th TX occasion), a fifth uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (5th TX occasion), a sixth uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (6th TX occasion), a seventh uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (7th TX occasion), and an eighth uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (8th TX occasion), for example, if the quantity of repetitions is equal to eight. The wireless device may send/transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) the first spatial domain transmission filter, a transport block (e.g., repetitions of the transport block) via the first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion, the second uplink signal/channel transmission occasion, the fifth uplink signal/channel transmission occasion, and the sixth uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. The wireless device may send/transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) the second spatial domain transmission filter, the transport block (e.g., repetitions of the transport block) via the third uplink signal/channel transmission occasion, the fourth uplink signal/channel transmission occasion, the seventh uplink signal/channel transmission occasion, and the eighth uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. FIG. 22 shows an example of sequential mapping in TDM (e.g., TCI state 1, TCI state 1, TCI state 2, TCI state 2). The wireless device may send, based on TCI state 1, a transport block (e.g., repetitions of the transport block) via a first TX occasion and a second TX occasion. The wireless device may send, based on TCI state 2, the transport block (e.g., repetitions of the transport block) via the third TX occasion and the fourth TX occasion.

The quantity of repetitions may be greater than two. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate a cyclic mapping. The cyclic mapping, for example, may enable mapping of the plurality of transmission powers to the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions (e.g., switching transmission powers cyclically). The wireless device may send/transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) the first transmission power, the transport block via a first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (1st TX occasion) of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. The wireless device may apply the first transmission power to the first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. The wireless device may send/transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) the second transmission power, the transport block via a second uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (2nd TX occasion) of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. The wireless device may apply the second transmission power to the second uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. The same transmission power mapping pattern may continue for remaining uplink signal/channel transmission occasion(s) of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions, for example, based on the one or more configuration parameters indicating the cyclic mapping. The remaining uplink signal/channel transmission occasion(s) may not comprise the first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion and the second uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. The plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions may comprise a first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion, a second uplink signal/channel transmission occasion, a third uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (3rd TX occasion), and a fourth uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (4th TX occasion), for example, if the quantity of repetitions is equal to four. The wireless device may send/transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) the first transmission power, the transport block (e.g., repetitions of the transport block) via the first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion and the third uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. The wireless device may send/transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) the second transmission power, the transport block (e.g., repetitions of the transport block) via the second uplink signal/channel transmission occasion and the fourth uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. The plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions may comprise a first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (1st TX occasion), a second uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (2nd TX occasion), a third uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (3rd TX occasion), a fourth uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (4th TX occasion), a fifth uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (5th TX occasion), a sixth uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (6th TX occasion), a seventh uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (7th TX occasion), and an eighth uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (8th TX occasion), for example, if the quantity of repetitions is equal to eight. The wireless device may send/transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) the first transmission power, the transport block (e.g., repetitions of the transport block) via the first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion, the third uplink signal/channel transmission occasion, the fifth uplink signal/channel transmission occasion, and the seventh uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. The wireless device may send/transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) the second transmission power, the transport block (e.g., repetitions of the transport block) via the second uplink signal/channel transmission occasion, the fourth uplink signal/channel transmission occasion, the sixth uplink signal/channel transmission occasion, and the eighth uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. FIG. 19 shows an example of cyclic mapping (e.g., TCI state 8, TCI state 23, TCI state 8, TCI state 23). The wireless device may send, based on a first transmission power (e.g., based on TCI state 8), a transport block (e.g., repetitions of the transport block) via the first TX occasion 1920-1 and the third TX occasion 1920-3. The wireless device may send, based on a second transmission power (e.g., based on TCI state 23), the transport block (e.g., repetitions of the transport block) via the second TX occasion 1920-2 and the fourth TX occasion 1920-4.

The quantity of repetitions may be greater than two. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate a sequential mapping. The sequential mapping may enable mapping of the plurality of transmission powers to the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. The wireless device may switch transmission powers sequentially based on the sequential mapping. The wireless device may send/transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) the first transmission power, the transport block (e.g., repetitions of the transport block) via a first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (1st TX occasion) of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions and a second uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (2nd TX occasion) of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. The wireless device may apply the first transmission power to the first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion and the second uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. The wireless device may send/transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) the second transmission power, the transport block (e.g., repetitions of the transport block) via a third uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (3rd TX occasion) of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions and a fourth uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (4th TX occasion) of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. The wireless device may apply the second transmission power to the third uplink signal/channel transmission occasion and the fourth uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. The same transmission power mapping pattern may continue for remaining uplink signal/channel transmission occasion(s) of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions based on the one or more configuration parameters indicating the sequential mapping. The remaining uplink signal/channel transmission occasion(s) may not comprise the first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion, the second uplink signal/channel transmission occasion, the third uplink signal/channel transmission occasion and the fourth uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. The plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions may comprise a first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion, a second uplink signal/channel transmission occasion, a third uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (3rd TX occasion), and a fourth uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (4th TX occasion), for example, if the quantity of repetitions is equal to four. The wireless device may send/transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) the first transmission power, the transport block (e.g., repetitions of the transport block) via the first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion and the second uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. The wireless device may send/transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) the second transmission power, the transport block (e.g., repetitions of the transport block) via the third uplink signal/channel transmission occasion and the fourth uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. The plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions may comprise a first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (1st TX occasion), a second uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (2nd TX occasion), a third uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (3rd TX occasion), a fourth uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (4th TX occasion), a fifth uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (5th TX occasion), a sixth uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (6th TX occasion), a seventh uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (7th TX occasion), and an eighth uplink signal/channel transmission occasion (8th TX occasion), for example, if the quantity of repetitions is equal to eight. The wireless device may send/transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) the first transmission power, the transport block (e.g., repetitions of the transport block) via the first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion, the second uplink signal/channel transmission occasion, the fifth uplink signal/channel transmission occasion, and the sixth uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. The wireless device may send/transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) the second transmission power, the transport block (e.g., repetitions of the transport block) via the third uplink signal/channel transmission occasion, the fourth uplink signal/channel transmission occasion, the seventh uplink signal/channel transmission occasion, and the eighth uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. FIG. 22 shows an example of sequential mapping in TDM (e.g., TCI state 1, TCI state 1, TCI state 2, TCI state 2). The wireless device may send, based on a first transmission power (e.g., based on TCI state 1), a transport block (e.g., repetitions of the transport block) via a first TX occasion and a second TX occasion. The wireless device may send, based on a second transmission power (e.g., based on TCI state 2), the transport block (e.g., repetitions of the transport block) via the third TX occasion and the fourth TX occasion. The wireless device may send/transmit the transport block (e.g., repetitions of the transport block) via the active uplink BWP of the cell.

FIG. 23 shows an example method for beam management. A wireless device may receive one or more messages. The wireless device may receive the one or more messages from a base station. The one or more messages may comprise one or more configuration parameters. The one or more configuration parameters may be for an uplink BWP of the cell. The wireless device may activate the uplink BWP.

At step 2304, the wireless device, may receive DCI scheduling a transport block. The wireless device may receive DCI activating a configured uplink grant (e.g., type 2 configured uplink grant). The wireless device may send/transmit the transport block for the configured uplink grant. The DCI may indicate at least two uplink resources. The DCI may comprise/indicate a TCI codepoint (or a TCI field) indicating the at least two uplink resources (e.g., SRS resources).

The wireless device may send/transmit the transport block for a configured uplink grant (e.g.,type 1 configured uplink grant). The one or more configuration parameters may indicate at least two uplink resources for the configured uplink grant. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate, for the configured uplink grant, a TCI codepoint (or a TCI field) indicating the at least two uplink resources (e.g., SRS resources). At step 2316 or at step 2308, the wireless device may send/transmit a transport block.

The TCI codepoint may indicate at least two activated TCI states. Each TCI state of the at least two activated TCI states may indicate a respective uplink resource of the at least two uplink resources. A first TCI state of the at least two activated TCI states may indicate a first uplink resource (e.g., SRS resource) of the at least two uplink resources. A second TCI state of the at least two activated TCI states may indicate a second uplink resource (e.g., SRS resource) of the at least two uplink resources. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate a plurality of uplink resources. The plurality of uplink resources may comprise the at least two uplink resources.

At step 2312, the wireless device may determine/select, for transmission of the transport block, at least two TCI states. The wireless device may determine/select the at least two TCI states, for example, based on the DCI indicating the at least two uplink resources. The wireless device may determine/select the at least two TCI states, for example, based on the one or more configuration parameters indicating the at least two uplink resources for the configured uplink grant (e.g., Type 1 configured uplink grant).

The wireless device may determine/select the at least two TCI states based on the TCI codepoint indicating the at least two activated TCI states (or the at least two uplink resources indicated by the at least two activated TCI states). The wireless device may determine/select the at least two TCI states based on at least one TCI codepoint, of one or more TCI codepoints, comprising/indicating at least two activated TCI states.

The wireless device may determine/select the at least two TCI states, for example, based on the one or more configuration parameters comprising an enabling parameter (e.g., set to enabled). The wireless device may determine/select the at least two TCI states based on the one or more configuration parameters comprising a second enabling parameter (e.g., set to enabled).

The wireless device may determine/select the at least two TCI states, for example, based on the one or more configuration parameters indicating a repetition scheme. The wireless device may determine/select the at least two TCI states, for example, based on a wireless device capability information indicating/comprising support of beam correspondence without uplink beam sweeping.

The wireless device may determine/select the at least two TCI states based on not being provided, by/via the one or more configuration parameters and/or an activation command, with at least one path loss reference RS. The one or more configuration parameters may not indicate a path loss reference RS for one or more SRS resource sets comprising the at least two uplink resources. A first SRS resource set may comprise a first uplink resource of the at least two uplink resources. A second SRS resource set may comprise a second uplink resource of the at least two uplink resources. The first SRS resource set and the second SRS resource set may be the same or may be different. The one or more configuration parameters may not indicate at least one path loss reference RS for the first SRS resource set. The one or more configuration parameters may not indicate at least one path loss reference RS for the second SRS resource set.

At step 2310, the wireless device may determine whether the at least two uplink resources are provided with spatial relations. At step 2312, the wireless device may determine/select the at least two TCI states, for example, based on one or more of the above considerations. The wireless device may determine/select the at least two TCI states, for example, based on not being provided, by/via the one or more configuration parameters and/or an activation command, with a spatial relation(s) for the at least two uplink resources. The one or more configuration parameters may not indicate a spatial relation for the at least two uplink resources. The one or more configuration parameters may not indicate a spatial relation for each uplink resource of the at least two uplink resources.

The wireless device may receive an activation command (e.g., TCI states activation/deactivation for wireless device-specific PDSCH MAC CE, TCI states activation/deactivation for wireless device-specific PUSCH MAC CE, etc.). The activation command may activate (e.g., select, indicate, or update) at least one TCI state. The wireless device may map the at least one TCI state to one or more TCI codepoints.

The wireless device may determine that at least one TCI codepoint, of the one or more TCI codepoints, comprises/indicates at least two activated TCI states (e.g., at least two different TCI states). The wireless device may determine/select the at least two TCI states based on the at least one TCI codepoint, of one or more TCI codepoints, comprising/indicating the at least two activated TCI states.

The wireless device may determine/select a selected TCI codepoint among the at least one TCI codepoint. The wireless device may determine/select the selected TCI codepoint among the at least one TCI codepoint, for example, based on the selected TCI codepoint having/being a lowest (or highest) TCI codepoint among the at least one TCI codepoint.

The selected TCI codepoint may indicate/comprise at least two activated TCI states. The (determined/selected) at least two TCI states for transmission of the transport block may be the at least two activated TCI states indicated by the selected TCI codepoint.

The wireless device may determine a plurality of spatial domain transmission filters based on the (selected/determined) at least two TCI states. The wireless device may determine (e.g., compute, calculate) a plurality of transmission powers based on the (selected/determined) at least two TCI states.

At step 2316, the wireless device may send/transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, the transport block via (e.g., across, over, in) a plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. The wireless device may send/transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) a first spatial domain transmission filter of the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, the transport block via (e.g., across, over, in) one or more first uplink signal/channel transmission occasions of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. The wireless device may send/transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) a second spatial domain transmission filter of the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, the transport block via (e.g., across, over, in) one or more second uplink signal/channel transmission occasions of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. The first spatial domain transmission filter may be determined based on a first TCI state of the at least two TCI states. The second spatial domain transmission filter may be determined based on a second TCI state of the at least two TCI states. An antenna port field in the DCI may indicate, for the transport block, DM-RS port(s) within a CDM group. An antenna port field in the configured uplink grant (e.g., type 1 configured uplink grant) may indicate, for the transport block, DM-RS port(s) within a CDM group.

The wireless device may send/transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, the transport block via an uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. The wireless device may send/transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) a first spatial domain transmission filter of the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, a first portion of the transport block via the uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. The wireless device may send/transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) a second spatial domain transmission filter of the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, a second portion of the transport block via the uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. An antenna port field in the DCI may indicate, for the transport block, DM-RS ports within at least two CDM groups. An antenna port field in the configured uplink grant (e.g., type 1 configured uplink grant) may indicate, for the transport block, DM-RS ports within at least two CDM groups.

The wireless device may send/transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) the plurality of transmission powers, the transport block via (e.g., across, over, in) a plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. The wireless device may send/transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) a first transmission power of the plurality of transmission powers, the transport block via (e.g., across, over, in) one or more first uplink signal/channel transmission occasions of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. The wireless device may send/transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) a second transmission power of the plurality of transmission powers, the transport block via (e.g., across, over, in) one or more second uplink signal/channel transmission occasions of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. An antenna port field in the DCI may indicate, for the transport block, DM-RS port(s) within a CDM group. An antenna port field in the configured uplink grant (e.g., type 1 configured uplink grant) may indicate, for the transport block, DM-RS port(s) within a CDM group.

The wireless device may send/transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) the plurality of transmission powers, the transport block via an uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. The wireless device may send/transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) a first transmission power of the plurality of transmission powers, a first portion of the transport block via the uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. The wireless device may send/transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) a second transmission power of the plurality of transmission powers, a second portion of the transport block in the uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. An antenna port field in the DCI may indicate, for the transport block, DM-RS ports within at least two CDM groups. An antenna port field in the configured uplink grant (e.g., type 1 configured uplink grant) may indicate, for the transport block, DM-RS ports within at least two CDM groups.

The one or more configuration parameters may indicate a quantity of repetitions. The DCI may indicate a quantity of repetitions. The quantity of repetitions may be for repetitions of transmission of a transport block (e.g., PUSCH transmission, PDSCH transmission). The quantity of repetitions may be for repetitions of transmission of a transport block via an uplink resource (e.g., PUCCH resource, SRS resource, PUSCH resource). The quantity of repetitions may indicate the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions (e.g., PUSCH transmission occasions, PUCCH transmission occasions) for transmission of the transport block. A quantity of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions may be equal to the quantity of repetitions.

The at least two uplink resources may be configured/activated with (e.g., by/via the one or more configuration parameters and/or an activation command) spatial relations. For example, the wireless device may determine (e.g., at step 2310), that the at least two uplink resources are configured with (e.g., by/via the one or more configuration parameters and/or an activation command) spatial relations. Each of the at least two uplink resources may be configured with a corresponding spatial relation. The wireless device may determine a plurality of spatial domain transmission filters based on the spatial relations, for example, if the at least two uplink resources are configured with spatial relations. At step 2308, the wireless device may send/transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters and based on the determination, the transport block via (e.g., across, over, in) a plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions and via the at least two uplink resources.

FIG. 24 shows an example method for beam management. The example method 2400 may be performed by a wireless device. The wireless device may receive one or more messages. The wireless device may receive the one or more messages from a base station. The one or more messages may comprise one or more configuration parameters.

The one or more configuration parameters may be for an uplink BWP of the cell. The wireless device may activate the uplink BWP. The wireless device may send/transmit a transport block (e.g., step 2412, 2416, 2424, or 2432) based on one or more considerations described herein.

At step 2404, the wireless device may receive DCI scheduling the transport block. The wireless device may receive DCI activating a configured uplink grant (e.g., type 2 configured uplink grant). The wireless device may send/transmit the transport block for the configured uplink grant.

The DCI may indicate at least two uplink resources. The DCI may comprise a TCI codepoint (or a TCI field) indicating the at least two uplink resources (e.g., SRS resources). The at least two uplink resources may comprise a first uplink resource and a second uplink resource.

The wireless device may send/transmit the transport block for a configured uplink grant (e.g., type 1 configured uplink grant). The one or more configuration parameters may indicate at least two uplink resources for the configured uplink grant. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate, for the configured uplink grant, a TCI codepoint (or a TCI field) indicating the at least two uplink resources (e.g., SRS resources). The at least two uplink resources may comprise a first uplink resource and a second uplink resource.

The TCI codepoint may indicate at least two activated TCI states. Each TCI state of the at least two activated TCI states may indicate a respective uplink resource of the at least two uplink resources. A first TCI state, of the at least two activated TCI states, may indicate a first uplink resource (e.g., a first SRS resource) of the at least two uplink resources. A second TCI state, of the at least two activated TCI states, may indicate a second uplink resource (e.g., a second SRS resource) of the at least two uplink resources.

The one or more configuration parameters may indicate a plurality of uplink resources. The plurality of uplink resources may comprise the at least two uplink resources.

At step 2408, the wireless device may determine/select, for transmission of the transport block, a first TCI state. The wireless device may determine/select the first TCI state, for example, based on the one or more configuration parameters comprising an enabling parameter (e.g., set to enabled). The wireless device may determine/select the first TCI state, for example, based on the one or more configuration parameters comprising a second enabling parameter (e.g., set to enabled). The wireless device may determine/select the first TCI state, for example, based on the one or more configuration parameters indicating a repetition scheme. The wireless device may determine/select the first TCI state, for example, based on wireless device capability information indicating/comprising support of beam correspondence without uplink beam sweeping.

The wireless device may determine/select the first TCI state, for example, based on not being provided (e.g., by/via the one or more configuration parameters and/or an activation command) with at least one path loss reference RS. The one or more configuration parameters may not indicate a path loss reference RS for an SRS resource set comprising the first uplink resource. A first SRS resource set may comprise the first uplink resource of the at least two uplink resources. A second SRS resource set may comprise the second uplink resource of the at least two uplink resources. The first SRS resource set and the second SRS resource set may be the same or may be different. The one or more configuration parameters may not indicate at least one path loss reference RS for the first SRS resource set. The one or more configuration parameters may or may not indicate at least one path loss reference RS for the second SRS resource set.

At step 2405, the wireless device may determine whether the first uplink resource is provided (e.g., by/via the one or more configuration parameters and/or an activation command) with a first spatial relation. The wireless device may determine/select the first TCI state, for example, based on not being provided (e.g., by/via the one or more configuration parameters and/or an activation command) with a first spatial relation for the first uplink resource. The one or more configuration parameters may not indicate a first spatial relation for the first uplink resource. The wireless device may not receive an activation command indicating/activating a first spatial relation for the first uplink resource. The wireless device may be provided with a second spatial relation for the second uplink resource. The second spatial relation may indicate a second reference signal. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate the second spatial relation for the second uplink resource. The wireless device may receive an activation command indicating/activating the second spatial relation for the second uplink resource. At step 2406, the wireless device may determine whether the second uplink resource is provided with the second spatial relation (e.g., by/via the one or more configuration parameters and/or an activation command) The wireless device may determine/select the first TCI state (e.g., at step 2408), for example, based on not being provided with the first spatial relation for the first uplink resource and being provided with a second spatial relation for the second uplink resource.

The (determined/selected) first TCI state may be a first TCI state (e.g., TCI state 8 as described with respect to FIGS. 17-20) of the at least two activated TCI states indicated by the selected TCI codepoint (e.g., as described with respect to FIG. 21A). The first TCI state, of the at least two activated TCI states, may be a first element/member in a set/vector comprising the at least two activated TCI states.

The (determined/selected) first TCI state may be a first TCI state (e.g., TCI state 8 as described with respect to FIGS. 17-20) of the first CORESET. The first CORESET may be identified/indicated by the CORESET indicator/index that is lowest among the one or more CORESET indicators/indexes of the one or more CORESETs (e.g., as described with with respect to FIG. 21B and FIG. 21C). The at least two CORESETs may comprise the first CORESET.

The wireless device may determine a plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, for example, based on the (selected/determined) first TCI state and the second spatial relation of the second uplink resource. The wireless device may determine a first spatial domain transmission filter, of the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, based on a first reference signal indicated by the (selected/determined) first TCI state. The wireless device may determine a second spatial domain transmission filter, of the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, based on the second reference signal indicated by the second spatial relation.

The wireless device may determine (e.g., compute, calculate) a plurality of transmission powers, for example, based on the (selected/determined) first TCI state and the second spatial relation of the second uplink resource. The wireless device may determine a first transmission power, of the plurality of transmission powers, based on a first reference signal indicated by the (selected/determined) first TCI state. The wireless device may determine a second transmission power, of the plurality of transmission powers, based on the second reference signal indicated by the second spatial relation.

The one or more configuration parameters and/or an activation command may indicate a first spatial relation for the first uplink resource and a second spatial relation for the second uplink resource. The wireless device may determine a plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, for example, based on the first spatial relation of the first uplink resource and the second spatial relation of the second uplink resource. The wireless device may determine a first spatial domain transmission filter, of the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, based on a first reference signal indicated by the first spatial relation. The wireless device may determine a second spatial domain transmission filter, of the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, based on a second reference signal indicated by the second spatial relation.

The one or more configuration parameters and/or an activation command may indicate a first spatial relation for the first uplink resource and may not indicate a second spatial relation for the second uplink resource. At step 2410, the wireless device may determine whether the second uplink resource is provided with a second spatial relation (e.g., by/via the one or more configuration parameters and/or an activation command) At step 2428, the wireless device may determine/select second TCI state, for example, based on not being provided (e.g., by/via the one or more configuration parameters and/or an activation command) with a second spatial relation for the second uplink resource. The wireless device may determine a plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, for example, based on the (selected/determined) first spatial relation of the first uplink resource and a second TCI state. The second TCI state may be determined in a manner similar to as described with respect to FIG. 25 (e.g., step 2508). The wireless device may determine a first spatial domain transmission filter, of the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, based on a first reference signal indicated by the first spatial relation. The wireless device may determine a second spatial domain transmission filter, of the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, based on a second reference signal indicated by the (selected/determined) second TCI state.

The one or more configuration parameters and/or an activation command may not indicate a first spatial relation for the first uplink resource and may not indicate a second spatial relation for the second uplink resource. At step 2420, the wireless device may determine/select a first TCI state, for example, based on not being provided (e.g., by/via the one or more configuration parameters and/or an activation command) with a first spatial relation for the first uplink resource. At step 2420, the wireless device may determine/select second TCI state, for example, based on not being provided (e.g., by/via the one or more configuration parameters and/or an activation command) with a second spatial relation for the second uplink resource. The first TCI state and the second TCI state may be determined in a manner similar to as described above with respect to FIG. 23. The wireless device may determine a plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, for example, based on the (selected/determined) first TCI state and the (selected/determined) second TCI state. The wireless device may determine a first spatial domain transmission filter, of the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, based on a first reference signal indicated by the (selected/determined) first TCI state. The wireless device may determine a second spatial domain transmission filter, of the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, based on a second reference signal indicated by the (selected/determined) second TCI state.

At step 2412, step 2416, step 2424, or step 2432, the wireless device may send/transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, the transport block via (e.g., across, over, in) a plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. The wireless device may send/transmit, based on the first spatial domain transmission filter of the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, the transport block via one or more first uplink signal/channel transmission occasions of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. The wireless device may send/transmit, based on the second spatial domain transmission filter of the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, the transport block via or more second uplink signal/channel transmission occasions of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. An antenna port field in the DCI may indicate, for the transport block, DM-RS port(s) within a CDM group. An antenna port field in the configured uplink grant (e.g., type 1 configured uplink grant) may indicate, for the transport block, DM-RS port(s) within a CDM group.

FIG. 25 shows an example method for beam management. The example method 2500 may be performed by a wireless device. The wireless device may receive one or more messages. The wireless device may receive the one or more messages from a base station. The one or more messages may comprise one or more configuration parameters.

The one or more configuration parameters may be for an uplink BWP of the cell. The wireless device may activate the uplink BWP. The wireless device may send/transmit a transport block (e.g., step 2512, 2520, 2524, or 2532) based on one or more considerations described herein. The one or more configuration parameters may be similar to the one or more configuration parameters described with respect to FIG. 24. At step 2504, the wireless device may receive DCI scheduling the transport block. The DCI may be similar to the DCI as received at step 2404 as described with respect to FIG. 24.

At step 2508, the wireless device may determine/select, for transmission of the transport block, a second TCI state. The wireless device may determine/select the second TCI state, for example, based on the one or more configuration parameters comprising an enabling parameter (e.g., set to enabled). The wireless device may determine/select the second TCI state, for example, based on the one or more configuration parameters comprising a second enabling parameter (e.g., set to enabled). The wireless device may determine/select the second TCI state, for example, based on the one or more configuration parameters indicating a repetition scheme. The wireless device may determine/select the second TCI state, for example, based on wireless device capability information indicating/comprising support of beam correspondence without uplink beam sweeping.

The wireless device may determine/select the second TCI state based on not being provided (e.g., by/via the one or more configuration parameters and/or an activation command) with at least one path loss reference RS. The one or more configuration parameters may not indicate a path loss reference RS for an SRS resource set comprising the second uplink resource. A first SRS resource set may comprise the first uplink resource of the at least two uplink resources. A second SRS resource set may comprise the second uplink resource of the at least two uplink resources. The first SRS resource set and the second SRS resource set may, for example, be the same or different. The one or more configuration parameters may or may not indicate at least one path loss reference RS for the first SRS resource set. The one or more configuration parameters may not indicate at least one path loss reference RS for the second SRS resource set.

At step 2505, the wireless device may determine whether the first uplink resource is provided (e.g., by/via the one or more configuration parameters and/or an activation command) with a first spatial relation. At step 2506, the wireless device may determine whether the second uplink resource is provided (e.g., by/via the one or more configuration parameters and/or an activation command) with a second spatial relation. At step 2508, the wireless device may determine/select the second TCI state based on not being provided (e.g., by/via the one or more configuration parameters and/or an activation command) with a second spatial relation for the second uplink resource. The one or more configuration parameters may not indicate a second spatial relation for the second uplink resource. The wireless device may not receive an activation command indicating/activating a second spatial relation for the second uplink resource. The wireless device may be provided with a first spatial relation for the first uplink resource. The first spatial relation may indicate a first reference signal. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate the first spatial relation for the first uplink resource. The wireless device may receive an activation command indicating/activating the first spatial relation for the first uplink resource. The wireless device may determine/select the second TCI state, for example, based on being provided with the first spatial relation for the first uplink resource and not being provided with the second spatial relation for the second uplink resource.

The (determined/selected) second TCI state may be a second TCI state (e.g., TCI state 23 as described with respect to FIGS. 17-20) of the at least two activated TCI states indicated by the selected TCI codepoint (as described with respect to FIG. 21A and FIG. 21B). The second TCI state of the at least two activated TCI states may be a second element/member in a set/vector comprising the at least two activated TCI states.

The (determined/selected) second TCI state may be a second TCI state (e.g., TCI state 23 as described with respect to FIGS. 17-20) of the second CORESET of the at least two CORESETs (e.g., described with respect to FIG. 21C). The second CORESET may be identified/indicated by a second CORESET indicator/index that is (second) lowest among the one or more CORESET indicators/indexes of the one or more CORESETs.

The wireless device may determine a plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, for example, based on the first spatial relation of the first uplink resource and the (selected/determined) second TCI state. The wireless device may determine a first spatial domain transmission filter, of the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, based on the first reference signal indicated by the first spatial relation. The wireless device may determine a second spatial domain transmission filter, of the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, based on a second reference signal indicated by the (selected/determined) second TCI state.

The wireless device may determine (e.g., compute/calculate) a plurality of transmission powers, for example, based on the first spatial relation of the first uplink resource and the (selected/determined) second TCI state. The wireless device may determine a first transmission power, of the plurality of transmission powers, based on the first reference signal indicated by the first spatial relation. The wireless device may determine a second transmission power, of the plurality of transmission powers, based on a second reference signal indicated by the (selected/determined) second TCI state.

The one or more configuration parameters and/or an activation command may indicate a first spatial relation for the first uplink resource and a second spatial relation for the second uplink resource. The wireless device may determine a plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, for example, based on the first spatial relation of the first uplink resource and the second spatial relation of the second uplink resource. The wireless device may determine a first spatial domain transmission filter, of the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, based on a first reference signal indicated by the first spatial relation. The wireless device may determine a second spatial domain transmission filter, of the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, based on a second reference signal indicated by the second spatial relation.

The one or more configuration parameters and/or an activation command may indicate a second spatial relation for the second uplink resource and may not indicate a first spatial relation for the first uplink resource. For example, at step 2510, the wireless device may determine whether the second uplink resource is provided (e.g., by/via the one or more configuration parameters and/or an activation command) with a second spatial relation. At step 2516, the wireless device may determine/select a first TCI state, for example, based on not being provided (e.g., by/via the one or more configuration parameters and/or an activation command) with a first spatial relation for the first uplink resource. The wireless device may determine a plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, for example, based on the (selected/determined) first TCI state and the second spatial relation of the second uplink resource. The first TCI state may be determined in a manner similar to as described above with respect to FIG. 24 (e.g., step 2408). The wireless device may determine a first spatial domain transmission filter, of the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, based on a first reference signal indicated by the (selected/determined) first TCI state. The wireless device may determine a second spatial domain transmission filter, of the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, based on a second reference signal indicated by the second spatial relation.

The one or more configuration parameters and/or an activation command may not indicate a first spatial relation for the first uplink resource and may not indicate a second spatial relation for the second uplink resource. At step 2528, the wireless device may determine/select a first TCI state, for example, based on not being provided (e.g., by/via the one or more configuration parameters and/or an activation command) with a first spatial relation for the first uplink resource. At step 2528, the wireless device may determine/select a second TCI state, for example, based on not being provided (e.g., by/via the one or more configuration parameters and/or an activation command) with a second spatial relation for the second uplink resource. The first TCI state and the second TCI state may be determined in a manner similar to as described above with respect to FIG. 23. The wireless device may determine a plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, for example, based on the (selected/determined) first TCI state and the (selected/determined) second TCI state. The wireless device may determine a first spatial domain transmission filter, of the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, based on a first reference signal indicated by the (selected/determined) first TCI state. The wireless device may determine a second spatial domain transmission filter, of the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, based on a second reference signal indicated by the (selected/determined) second TCI state.

At step 2512, step 2520, step 2524, or step 2532, the wireless device may send/transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, the transport block via (e.g., across, over, in) a plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. The wireless device may send/transmit, based on the first spatial domain transmission filter of the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, the transport block via one or more first uplink signal/channel transmission occasions of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. The wireless device may send/transmit, based on the second spatial domain transmission filter of the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, the transport block via one or more second uplink signal/channel transmission occasions of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. An antenna port field in the DCI may indicate, for the transport block, DM-RS port(s) within a CDM group. An antenna port field in the configured uplink grant (e.g., type 1 configured uplink grant) may indicate for the transport block, DM-RS port(s) within a CDM group.

The wireless device may send/transmit, based on the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, the transport block via an uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. The wireless device may send/transmit, based on the first spatial domain transmission filter of the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, a first portion of the transport block via the uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. The wireless device may send/transmit, based on the second spatial domain transmission filter of the plurality of spatial domain transmission filters, a second portion of the transport block via the uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. An antenna port field in the DCI may indicate, for the transport block, DM-RS ports within at least two CDM groups. An antenna port field in the configured uplink grant (e.g., type 1 configured uplink grant) may indicate, for the transport block, DM-RS ports within at least two CDM groups.

The wireless device may send/transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) the plurality of transmission powers, the transport block via (e.g., across, over, in) a plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. The wireless device may send/transmit, based on the first transmission power of the plurality of transmission powers, the transport block via one or more first uplink signal/channel transmission occasions of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. The wireless device may send/transmit, based on the second transmission power of the plurality of transmission powers, the transport block via one or more second uplink signal/channel transmission occasions of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. An antenna port field in the DCI may indicate, for the transport block, DM-RS port(s) within a CDM group. An antenna port field in the configured uplink grant (e.g., type 1 configured uplink grant) may indicate, for the transport block, DM-RS port(s) within a CDM group.

The wireless device may send/transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) the plurality of transmission powers, the transport block via an uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. The wireless device may send/transmit, based on (e.g., with/using) the first transmission power of the plurality of transmission powers, a first portion of the transport block via the uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. The wireless device may send/transmit, based on the second transmission power of the plurality of transmission powers, a second portion of the transport block via the uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. An antenna port field in the DCI may indicate, for the transport block, DM-RS ports within at least two CDM groups. An antenna port field in the configured uplink grant (e.g., type 1 configured uplink grant) may indicate, for the transport block, DM-RS ports within at least two CDM groups.

The one or more configuration parameters may indicate a quantity of repetitions. The DCI may indicate a quantity of repetitions. The quantity of repetitions may be for repetitions of transmission of a transport block (e.g., PUSCH transmission, PDSCH transmission) via an uplink resource (e.g., PUCCH resource, SRS resource, PUSCH resource). The quantity of repetitions may indicate the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions (e.g., PUSCH transmission occasions, PUCCH transmission occasions) for transmission of the transport block. A quantity of the plurality of uplink signal/channel transmission occasions may be equal to the quantity of repetitions.

The wireless device may be equipped with a plurality of antenna panels. The plurality of antenna panels may be identified/indicated by a plurality of antenna panel indicators/indexes. Each antenna panel of the plurality of antenna panels may be indicated/identified by a respective antenna panel indicator/index of the plurality of antenna panel indicators/indexes. A first antenna panel of the plurality of antenna panels may be identified/indicated by a first antenna panel indicator/index of the plurality of antenna panel indicators/indexes. A second antenna panel of the plurality of antenna panels may be identified/indicated by a second antenna panel indicator/index of the plurality of antenna panel indicators/indexes. A third antenna panel of the plurality of antenna panels may be identified/indicated by a third antenna panel indicator/index of the plurality of antenna panel indicators/indexes.

The one or more configuration parameters may indicate the plurality of antenna panel indicators/indexes for the plurality of antenna panels. The plurality of antenna panels being indicated/identified by the plurality of antenna panel indicators/indexes may comprise the one or more configuration parameters indicating the plurality of antenna panel indicators/indexes for the plurality of antenna panels. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate the first antenna panel indicator/index for the first antenna panel. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate the second antenna panel indicator/index for the second antenna panel. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate the third antenna panel indicator/index for the third antenna panel.

The one or more configuration parameters may indicate one or more SRS resource sets (e.g., by a higher layer parameter SRS-ResourceSet). The one or more SRS resource sets may comprise the SRS resource set. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate SRS resource set indicators/indexes (e.g., provided by a higher layer parameter SRS-ResourceSetId) for the one or more SRS resource sets. Each SRS resource set of the one or more SRS resource sets may be indicated/identified by a respective one SRS resource set indicator/index of the SRS resource set indicators/indexes. A first SRS resource set of the one or more SRS resource sets may be indicated/identified by a first SRS resource set indicator/index of the SRS resource set indicators/indexes. A second SRS resource set of the one or more SRS resource sets may be indicated/identified by a second SRS resource set indicator/index of the SRS resource set indicators/indexes.

The wireless device may send/transmit a first SRS via an SRS resource of a first SRS resource set of the one or more SRS resource sets. The wireless device may transmit the first SRS via a first antenna panel of the plurality of antenna panels. The wireless device may send/transmit a second SRS via an SRS resource of a second SRS resource set of the one or more SRS resource sets. The wireless device may transmit the second SRS via a second antenna panel of the plurality of antenna panels. Each SRS resource set of the one or more SRS resource sets may be associated with a respective antenna panel of the plurality of antenna panels. The first SRS resource set index may identify the first antenna panel. The second SRS resource set index may identify the second antenna panel. The first antenna panel index and the first SRS resource set index may be the same. The second antenna panel index and the second SRS resource set index may be the same. Each antenna panel, of the plurality of antenna panels, may be identified by a respective one SRS resource set index of the SRS resource set indexes. The first antenna panel index may be equal to the first SRS resource set index, for example, based on the transmitting the first SRS with the first antenna panel. The second antenna panel index may be equal to the second SRS resource set index, for example, based on the transmitting the second SRS with the second antenna panel. The plurality of antenna panels being identified by the plurality of antenna panel indexes may comprise the one or more configuration parameters indicating, for the plurality of antenna panels, the SRS resource set indexes as the plurality of antenna panel indexes.

The one or more configuration parameters may indicate the plurality of antenna panel indicators/indexes for one or more TCI states. The one or more TCI states may comprise the plurality of antenna panel indicators/indexes identifying/indicating the plurality of antenna panels. Each TCI state of the one or more TCI states may comprise a respective antenna panel index of the plurality of antenna panel indexes. Each TCI state of the one or more TCI states may be associated with a respective antenna panel of the plurality of antenna panels identified/indicated by the plurality of antenna panel indexes. The first TCI state may comprise the first antenna panel index identifying/indicating the first antenna panel. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate the first antenna panel index for the first TCI state. The first TCI state may be associated with the first antenna panel. The second TCI state may comprise the second antenna panel index identifying/indicating the second antenna panel. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate the second antenna panel index for the second TCI state. The second TCI state may be associated with the second antenna panel. The third TCI state may comprise the third antenna panel index identifying/indicating the third antenna panel. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate the third antenna panel index for the third TCI state. The third TCI state may be associated with the third antenna panel. The fourth TCI state may comprise the fourth antenna panel index identifying/indicating the fourth antenna panel. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate the fourth antenna panel index for the fourth TCI state. The fourth TCI state may be associated with the fourth antenna panel.

A TCI state of the one or more TCI states may not comprise an antenna panel indicator/index. The one or more configuration parameters may not indicate, for the TCI state, the antenna panel indicator/index. The wireless device may determine, for the TCI state, a default antenna panel indicator/index (or a default antenna panel). The wireless device may determine, for the TCI state, a default antenna panel indicator/index (or a default antenna panel), for example, based on the TCI state not comprising the antenna panel index. The default antenna panel indicator/index may be equal to zero (or any other value). The default antenna panel indicator/index may be equal to one (or any other value). The default antenna panel indicator/index may identify/indicate a first antenna panel of the plurality of antenna panels. The first antenna panel may be the default antenna panel. The plurality of antenna panel indicators/indexes may comprise the default antenna panel index.

The one or more TCI states may be associated with the plurality of antenna panels. Each TCI state of the one or more TCI states may be associated with a respective antenna panel of the plurality of antenna panels. A TCI state, of the one or more TCI states, being associated with an antenna panel of the plurality of antenna panels may comprise the one or more configuration parameters indicating, for the TCI state, an antenna panel indicator/index, of the plurality of antenna panel indicators/indexes. The antenna panel indicator/index may identify/indicate the antenna panel. The first TCI may be associated with the first antenna panel, the second TCI state may be associated with the second antenna panel, the third TCI state may be associated with the third antenna panel, and the fourth TCI state may be associated with the fourth antenna panel.

The wireless device may receive the one or more TCI states via the plurality of antenna panels. The wireless device may receive each TCI state of the one or more TCI states via a respective antenna panel of the plurality of antenna panels. The wireless device may receive the first TCI state via the first antenna panel, the second TCI state via the second antenna panel, the third TCI state via the third antenna panel, and the fourth TCI state via the fourth antenna panel. A TCI state, of the one or more TCI states, being associated with an antenna panel of the plurality of antenna panels may comprise receiving the TCI state via the antenna panel. Receiving a TCI state, of the one or more TCI states, via an antenna panel of the plurality of antenna panels may comprise receiving a reference signal indicated by the TCI state via the antenna panel. The wireless device may send/transmit a report (e.g., beam report, beam management report, CSI report, channel report, etc.) indicating the reference signal and the antenna panel. The wireless device may receive the reference signal via the antenna panel. The report may be periodic. The wireless device may send/transmit the report via an uplink channel (e.g., PUCCH, PUSCH). A quality of the reference signal (e.g., RSRP, SINR, SNR) may be highest if the reference signal is received via the antenna panel. The quality of the reference signal received via the antenna panel may be highest among qualities of the received signal received via the plurality of antenna panels.

The plurality of CORESETs may be associated with the plurality of antenna panels. The plurality of CORESETs being associated with the plurality of antenna panels may comprise receiving, via the plurality of antenna panels, the one or more TCI states of the plurality of CORESETs. A CORESET, of the plurality of CORESETs, being associated with an antenna panel of the plurality of antenna panels may comprise receiving a TCI state of the CORESET via the antenna panel. The one or more TCI states may comprise the TCI state. The first CORESET may be associated with the first antenna panel, for example, based on receiving the first TCI state of the first CORESET via the first antenna panel. The second CORESET may be associated with the second antenna panel, for example, based on receiving the second TCI state of the second CORESET via the second antenna panel. The third CORESET may be associated with the third antenna panel, for example, based on receiving the third TCI state of the third CORESET via the third antenna panel. The fourth CORESET may be associated with the fourth antenna panel, for example, based on receiving the fourth TCI state of the fourth CORESET via the fourth antenna panel.

The wireless device may support transmission of simultaneous uplink signals via/using at least two antenna panels of the plurality of antenna panels. The simultaneous uplink transmissions may be via/occur on the (same) cell. The wireless device may support a repetition scheme based on supporting transmission of simultaneous uplink transmissions via/using the at least two antenna panels. The repetition scheme may be in a frequency domain (e.g., FDM). The repetition scheme may be in a spatial/code domain (e.g., SDM)

The wireless device (e.g., the wireless device 1708) may send/transmit, via a first antenna panel of the plurality of antenna panels and with/using the first spatial domain transmission filter, the transport block via (e.g., across, over, in) the one or more first uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. The wireless device may send/transmit, via a second antenna panel of the plurality of antenna panels and with/using the second spatial domain transmission filter, the transport block via (e.g., across, over, in) the one or more second uplink signal/channel transmission occasions.

The wireless device (e.g., the wireless device 1804) may send/transmit, via a first antenna panel of the plurality of antenna panels and with/using the first spatial domain transmission filter (TCI state 8), the first portion of the transport block 1824-1 via the first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion 1820-1. The wireless device may send/transmit, via a second antenna panel of the plurality of antenna panels and with/using the second spatial domain transmission filter (TCI state 23), the second portion of the transport block 1824-2 via the second uplink signal/channel transmission occasion 1820-2. The first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion 1820-1 and the second uplink signal/channel transmission occasion 1820-2 may be the same. The first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion 1820-1 and the second uplink signal/channel transmission occasion 1820-2 may be the uplink signal/channel transmission occasion.

The wireless device (e.g., the wireless device 1904) may send/transmit, via a first antenna panel of the plurality of antenna panels and with/using the first transmission power, the transport block via (e.g., across, over, in) the one or more first uplink signal/channel transmission occasions. The wireless device may send/transmit, via a second antenna panel of the plurality of antenna panels and with/using the second transmission power, the transport block via (e.g., across, over, in) the one or more second uplink signal/channel transmission occasions.

The wireless device (e.g., the wireless device 2004) may send/transmit, via a first antenna panel of the plurality of antenna panels and with/using the first transmission power (e.g., based on TCI state 8), the first portion of the transport block via the first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. The wireless device may send/transmit, via a second antenna panel of the plurality of antenna panels and with/using the second transmission power (e.g., based on TCI state 23), the second portion of the transport block via the second uplink signal/channel transmission occasion. The first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion and the second uplink signal/channel transmission occasion may be the same. The first uplink signal/channel transmission occasion and the second uplink signal/channel transmission occasion may be the uplink signal/channel transmission occasion.

FIG. 26 shows an example method for transmission of a transport block. The example method 2600 may be performed by a wireless device. At step 2604, the wireless device may receive a message (e.g., DCI, message associated with a configured uplink grant). The message may comprise/indicate a first SRI and a second SRI. The first SRI may indicate a first SRS resource of a first SRS resource set. The second SRI may comprise a second SRS resource of a second SRS resource set. At step 2608, the wireless device may send/transmit, at least one transport block based on the first SRI. At step 2612, the wireless device may send/transmit, at least one repetition of the transport block based on the second SRI. The transmitting the at least one transport block may comprise transmitting the at least one transport block using a first spatial domain transmission filter associated with a first spatial relation of the first SRS resource. The transmitting the at least one repetition of the transport block may comprise transmitting the at least one repetition of the transport block using a second spatial domain transmission filter associated with a second spatial relation of the second resource.

A wireless device may perform a method comprising multiple operations. The wireless device may receive a message associated with a configured uplink grant. The message may comprises: a first sounding reference signal (SRS) resource indicator (SRI) indicating a first SRS resource of a first SRS resource set; and a second SRI indicating a second SRS resource of a second SRS resource set different from the first SRS resource set. The wireless device may transmit, based on the first SRI, at least one transport block associated with the configured uplink grant. The wireless device may transmit, based on the second SRI, at least one repetition of the transport block. The wireless device may also perform one or more additional operations. The transmitting the at least one transport block may comprise transmitting the at least one transport block using a first spatial domain transmission filter associated with a first spatial relation of the first SRS resource. The transmitting the at least one repetition of the transport block may comprise transmitting the at least one repetition of the transport block using a second spatial domain transmission filter associated with a second spatial relation of the second SRS resource. The wireless device may receive at least one configuration parameter for a cell. The at least one configuration parameter may indicate: the first SRS resource set; and the second SRS resource set. The wireless device may determine, based on the first SRS resource, the first spatial domain transmission filter for the transmitting the at least one transport block. The wireless device may determine, based on the second SRS resource, the second spatial domain transmission filter for the transmitting the at least one repetition of the transport block. The determining the first spatial domain transmission filter may comprise determining the first spatial domain transmission filter based on a first reference signal indicated by the first spatial relation of the first SRS resource. The determining the second spatial domain transmission filter may comprise determining the second spatial domain transmission filter based on a second reference signal indicated by the second spatial relation of the second SRS resource. The transmitting the at least one transport block may comprise transmitting the at least one transport block using a first transmission power based on the first SRS resource. The transmitting the at least one repetition of the transport block may comprise transmitting the at least one repetition of the transport block using a second transmission power based on the second SRS resource. The wireless device may receive an activation command indicating, for the first SRS resource, the first spatial relation associated with the first spatial domain transmission filter, and indicating, for the second SRS, the second spatial relation associated with the second spatial domain transmission filter. The transmitting the at least one transport block may comprise transmitting the at least one transport block using a first spatial domain transmission filter associated with a first default transmission configuration indication (TCI) state. The transmitting the at least one repetition of the transport block may comprise transmitting the at least one repetition of the transport block using a second spatial domain transmission filter associated with a second default TCI state. The transmitting the at least one transport block may comprise transmitting the at least one transport block using a first transmission power based on the first default TCI state. The transmitting the at least one repetition of the transport may comprise transmitting the at least one repetition of the transport block using a second transmission power based on the second default TCI state. The transmitting the at least one transport block using the first spatial domain transmission filter associated with the first default TCI state and the transmitting the at least one repetition of the transport block using the second spatial domain transmission filter associated with the second default TCI state may be based on the first SRS resource not being associated with a spatial relation and the second SRS resource not being associated with a spatial relation. The first default TCI state may be a TCI state of a control resource set (CORESET) with a lowest CORESET index among one or more CORESET indexes of one or more CORESETs. The second default TCI state may be a TCI state of a control resource set (CORESET) with a second lowest CORESET index among one or more CORESET indexes of one or more CORESETs. The wireless device may receive an activation command indicating the first default TCI state and the second default TCI state. The first default TCI state may be a first TCI state in a lowest TCI codepoint indicating two TCI states. The second default TCI state may a second TCI state in a lowest TCI codepoint indicating two TCI states. The message may comprise a parameter indicating a use of default transmission parameters. The transmitting the at least one transport block using the first spatial domain transmission filter associated with the first default TCI state and the transmitting the at least one repetition of the transport block using the second spatial domain transmission filter associated with the second default TCI state may be based on the message comprising the parameter. The transmitting the at least one transport block and the at least one repetition of the transport block may be based on the message not indicating at least one path loss reference signal. The transmitting the at least one transport block and the at least one repetition of the transport block may be based on at least one TCI codepoint indicating two different TCI states. The transmitting the at least one transport block and the at least one repetition of the transport block may be based on the message comprising the first SRI and the second SRI. The transmitting the at least one transport block and the at least one repetition of the transport block may be based on the message indicating a repetition scheme. The message may indicate, for the configured uplink grant, a time domain resource allocation (TDRA) field indicating a quantity of repetitions for the transport block. The transmitting the at least one transport block may comprise transmitting at least one first physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) transmission during at least one first transmission occasion. The transmitting the at least one repetition of the transport block may comprise transmitting at least one second PUSCH transmission during at least one second transmission occasion that is different from the at least one first transmission occasion. The message may indicate a cyclic mapping. The at least one first transmission occasion may comprise a first transmission occasion and a third transmission occasion. The at least one second transmission occasion may comprise a second transmission occasion and a fourth transmission occasion. The message may indicate a sequential mapping. The at least one first transmission occasion may comprise a first transmission occasion and a second transmission occasion. The at least one second transmission occasion may comprise a third transmission occasion and a fourth transmission occasion. The transmitting the at least one transport block may comprise transmitting the at least one transport block via a first antenna panel of a plurality of antenna panels at the wireless device. The transmitting the at least one repetition of the transport block may comprise transmitting the at least one repetition of the transport block via a second antenna panel of the plurality of antenna panels. The transmitting the at least one transport block may comprise transmitting the at least one transport block via a first transmitting beam. The transmitting the at least one repetition of the transport block may comprise transmitting the at least one repetition of the transport block via a second transmitting beam. The configured uplink grant may be a type 1 configured uplink grant. The wireless device may comprise one or more processors; and memory storing instructions that, when executed by the one or more processors, cause the wireless device to perform the described method, additional operations and/or include the additional elements. A system may comprise the wireless device configured to perform the described method, additional operations and/or include the additional elements; and a base station configured to send the message associated with the configured uplink grant. A computer-readable medium may store instructions that, when executed, cause performance of the described method, additional operations and/or include the additional elements.

A wireless device may perform a method comprising multiple operations. The wireless device may receive a downlink control information (DCI) message scheduling transmission of a transport block. The DCI message may comprise a first sounding reference signal (SRS) resource indicator (SRI) indicating a first SRS resource of a first SRS resource set; and a second SRI indicating a second SRS resource of a second SRS resource set different from the first SRS resource set. The wireless device may transmit, based on the first SRI, the transport block. The wireless device may transmit, based on the second SRI, at least one repetition of the transport block. The wireless device may also perform one or more additional operations. The transmitting the transport block may comprise transmitting the transport block using a first spatial domain transmission filter associated with a first spatial relation of the first SRS resource. The transmitting the at least one repetition of the transport block may comprise transmitting the at least one repetition of the transport block using a second spatial domain transmission filter associated with a second spatial relation of the second SRS resource. The wireless device may receive at least one configuration parameter for a cell. The at least one configuration parameter may indicate: the first SRS resource set; and the second SRS resource set. The wireless device may determine, based on the first SRS resource, a first spatial domain transmission filter for the transmitting the transport block. The wireless device may determine, based on the second SRS resource, a second spatial domain transmission filter for the transmitting the at least one repetition of the transport block. The wireless device may receive an activation command indicating, for the first SRS resource, a first spatial relation associated with a first spatial domain transmission filter. The transmitting the transport block may comprise transmitting the transport block using the first spatial domain transmission filter. The transmitting the transport block may comprise transmitting at least one first physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) transmission during at least one first transmission occasion. The transmitting the at least one repetition of the transport block may comprise transmitting at least one second PUSCH transmission during at least one second transmission occasion that is different from the at least one first transmission occasion. The wireless device may determine that the first SRS resource is not associated with a spatial relation and that the second SRS resource is not associated with a spatial relation. The transmitting the transport block may be further based on a first transmission configuration indicator (TCI) state. The transmitting the at least one repetition of the transport block may be further based on a second TCI state different from the first TCI state. The wireless device may comprise one or more processors; and memory storing instructions that, when executed by the one or more processors, cause the wireless device to perform the described method, additional operations and/or include the additional elements. A system may comprise the wireless device configured to perform the described method, additional operations and/or include the additional elements; and a base station configured to send the DCI message. A computer-readable medium may store instructions that, when executed, cause performance of the described method, additional operations and/or include the additional elements.

A wireless device may perform a method comprising multiple operations. The wireless device may receive a message scheduling transmission of a transport block. The message may comprise: a first sounding reference signal (SRS) resource indicator (SRI) indicating a first SRS resource of a first SRS resource set; and a second SRI indicating a second SRS resource of a second SRS resource set different from the first SRS resource set. The wireless device may transmit, based on the first SRI and during at least one first transmission occasion, the transport block. The wireless device may transmit, based on the second SRI and during at least one second transmission occasion different from the first transmission occasion, at least one repetition of the transport block. The wireless device may also perform one or more additional operations. The message may comprise at least one of: a configured uplink grant; or a downlink control information (DCI) message. The transmitting the transport block may comprise transmitting the transport block using a first spatial domain transmission filter associated with a first spatial relation of the first SRS resource. The transmitting the at least one repetition of the transport block may comprise transmitting the at least one repetition of the transport block using a second spatial domain transmission filter associated with a second spatial relation of the second SRS resource. The wireless device may receive at least one configuration parameter for a cell. The at least one configuration parameter may indicate: the first SRS resource set; and the second SRS resource set. The wireless device may determine, based on the first SRS resource, a first spatial domain transmission filter for the transmitting the transport block. The wireless device may determine, based on the second SRS resource, a second spatial domain transmission filter for the transmitting the at least one repetition of the transport block. The wireless device may receive an activation command indicating, for the first SRS resource, a first spatial relation associated with a first spatial domain transmission filter. The transmitting the transport block may comprises transmitting the transport block using the first spatial domain transmission filter. The wireless device may comprise one or more processors; and memory storing instructions that, when executed by the one or more processors, cause the wireless device to perform the described method, additional operations and/or include the additional elements. A system may comprise the wireless device configured to perform the described method, additional operations and/or include the additional elements; and a base station configured to send the message. A computer-readable medium may store instructions that, when executed, cause performance of the described method, additional operations and/or include the additional elements.

A wireless device may perform a method comprising multiple operations. The wireless device may receive one or more messages comprising one or more configuration parameters indicating, for a configured uplink grant: a first sounding reference signal (SRS) resource indicator (SRI) field indicating a first SRS resource in a first SRS resource set; and a second SRI field indicating a second SRS resource in a second SRS resource set different from the first SRS resource set. The wireless device may transmit repetitions of a transport block of the configured uplink grant with: a first spatial domain transmission filter, in one or more first transmission occasions, determined based on a first spatial relation of the first SRS resource; and a second spatial domain transmission filter, in one or more second transmission occasions, determined based on a second spatial relation of the second SRS resource. The wireless device may also perform one or more additional operations. The wireless device may comprise one or more processors; and memory storing instructions that, when executed by the one or more processors, cause the wireless device to perform the described method, additional operations and/or include the additional elements. A system may comprise the wireless device configured to perform the described method, additional operations and/or include the additional elements; and a base station configured to send the one or more messages. A computer-readable medium may store instructions that, when executed, cause performance of the described method, additional operations and/or include the additional elements.

A wireless device may perform a method comprising multiple operations. The wireless device may receive one or more messages comprising one or more configuration parameters for transmissions of repetitions of a transport block for a configured uplink grant. The one or more configuration parameters may comprise: a first sounding reference signal (SRS) resource indicator (SRI) field indicating a first SRS resource of a first SRS resource set; and a second SRI field indicating a second SRS resource of a second SRS resource set different from the first SRS resource set. The wireless device may transmit, with a first spatial domain transmission filter determined based on a first spatial relation of the first SRS resource, one or more first repetitions of the repetitions. The wireless device may transmit, with a second spatial domain transmission filter determined based on a second spatial relation of the second SRS resource, one or more second repetitions of the repetitions. The wireless device may also perform one or more additional operations. The wireless device may comprise one or more processors; and memory storing instructions that, when executed by the one or more processors, cause the wireless device to perform the described method, additional operations and/or include the additional elements. A system may comprise the wireless device configured to perform the described method, additional operations and/or include the additional elements; and a base station configured to send the one or more messages. A computer-readable medium may store instructions that, when executed, cause performance of the described method, additional operations and/or include the additional elements.

A wireless device may perform a method comprising multiple operations. The wireless device may receive one or more messages comprising one or more configuration parameters indicating, for a configured uplink grant: a first sounding reference signal (SRS) resource indicator (SRI) field indicating a first SRS resource of a first SRS resource set; and a second SRI field indicating a second SRS resource of a second SRS resource set different from the first SRS resource set. The wireless device may transmit: one or more first repetitions of a transport block of the configured uplink grant with a first spatial domain transmission filter determined based on a first spatial relation of the first SRS resource; and one or more second repetitions of the transport block with a second spatial domain transmission filter determined based on a second spatial relation of the second SRS resource. The wireless device may also perform one or more additional operations. The wireless device may comprise one or more processors; and memory storing instructions that, when executed by the one or more processors, cause the wireless device to perform the described method, additional operations and/or include the additional elements. A system may comprise the wireless device configured to perform the described method, additional operations and/or include the additional elements; and a base station configured to send the one or more messages. A computer-readable medium may store instructions that, when executed, cause performance of the described method, additional operations and/or include the additional elements.

A wireless device may perform a method comprising multiple operations. The wireless device may receive one or more messages comprising one or more configuration parameters for a cell. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate: a first sounding reference signal (SRS) resource set; and a second SRS resource set. The wireless device may receive a downlink control information (DCI) scheduling transmission of a transport block. The DCI may comprise: a first resource indicator (SRI) field indicating a first SRS resource in the first SRS resource set; and a second SRI field indicating a second SRS resource in the second SRS resource set. The wireless device may, based on the first SRS resource not being associated with a spatial relation and the second SRS resource not being associated with a spatial relation, transmit repetitions of the transport block with: a first transmission parameter, in one or more first transmission occasions, determined based on a first transmission configuration indicator (TCI) state; and a second transmission parameter, in one or more second transmission occasions, determined based on a second TCI state. The wireless device may also perform one or more additional operations. The first transmission parameter may be a first spatial domain transmission filter. The second transmission parameter may be a second spatial domain transmission filter. The first transmission parameter may be a first transmission power. The second transmission parameter may be a second transmission power. The wireless device may comprise one or more processors; and memory storing instructions that, when executed by the one or more processors, cause the wireless device to perform the described method, additional operations and/or include the additional elements. A system may comprise the wireless device configured to perform the described method, additional operations and/or include the additional elements; and a base station configured to send the one or more messages. A computer-readable medium may store instructions that, when executed, cause performance of the described method, additional operations and/or include the additional elements.

A wireless device may perform a method comprising multiple operations. The wireless device may receive downlink control information (DCI): scheduling transmission of a transport block; and indicating at least two sounding reference signal (SRS) resources. The wireless device may, based on the at least two SRS resources not being associated with a spatial relation, determine, for transmission of the transport block, at least two transmission configuration indicator (TCI) states. The wireless device may transmit repetitions of the transport block with at least two transmission parameters determined based on the at least two TCI states. The wireless device may also perform one or more additional operations. The at least two transmission parameters may comprise at least two spatial domain transmission filters. The at least two transmission parameters may comprise at least two transmission powers. The wireless device may comprise one or more processors; and memory storing instructions that, when executed by the one or more processors, cause the wireless device to perform the described method, additional operations and/or include the additional elements. A system may comprise the wireless device configured to perform the described method, additional operations and/or include the additional elements; and a base station configured to send the DCI. A computer-readable medium may store instructions that, when executed, cause performance of the described method, additional operations and/or include the additional elements.

A wireless device may perform a method comprising multiple operations. The wireless device may receive one or more messages comprising one or more configuration parameters. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate, for a configured uplink grant, at least two sounding reference signal (SRS) resources. The wireless device may, based on the at least two SRS resources not being associated with a spatial relation, determine, for transmission of a transport block of the configured uplink grant, at least two transmission configuration indicator (TCI) states. The wireless device may transmit repetitions of the transport block with at least two transmission parameters determined based on the at least two TCI states. The wireless device may also perform one or more additional operations. The at least two transmission parameters may comprise at least two spatial domain transmission filters. The at least two transmission parameters may comprise at least two transmission powers. The wireless device may comprise one or more processors; and memory storing instructions that, when executed by the one or more processors, cause the wireless device to perform the described method, additional operations and/or include the additional elements. A system may comprise the wireless device configured to perform the described method, additional operations and/or include the additional elements; and a base station configured to send the one or more messages. A computer-readable medium may store instructions that, when executed, cause performance of the described method, additional operations and/or include the additional elements.

One or more of the operations described herein may be conditional. For example, one or more operations may be performed if certain criteria are met, such as in a wireless device, a base station, a radio environment, a network, a combination of the above, and/or the like. Example criteria may be based on one or more conditions such as wireless device and/or network node configurations, traffic load, initial system set up, packet sizes, traffic characteristics, a combination of the above, and/or the like. If the one or more criteria are met, various examples may be used. It may be possible to implement any portion of the examples described herein in any order and based on any condition.

A base station may communicate with one or more of wireless devices. Wireless devices and/or base stations may support multiple technologies, and/or multiple releases of the same technology. Wireless devices may have some specific capability(ies) depending on wireless device category and/or capability(ies). A base station may comprise multiple sectors, cells, and/or portions of transmission entities. A base station communicating with a plurality of wireless devices may refer to a base station communicating with a subset of the total wireless devices in a coverage area. Wireless devices referred to herein may correspond to a plurality of wireless devices compatible with a given LTE, 5G, or other 3GPP or non-3GPP release with a given capability and in a given sector of a base station. A plurality of wireless devices may refer to a selected plurality of wireless devices, a subset of total wireless devices in a coverage area, and/or any group of wireless devices. Such devices may operate, function, and/or perform based on or according to drawings and/or descriptions herein, and/or the like. There may be a plurality of base stations and/or a plurality of wireless devices in a coverage area that may not comply with the disclosed methods, for example, because those wireless devices and/or base stations may perform based on older releases of LTE, 5G, or other 3GPP or non-3GPP technology.

One or more parameters, fields, and/or information elements (IEs), may comprise one or more information objects, values, and/or any other information. An information object may comprise one or more other objects. At least some (or all) parameters, fields, IEs, and/or the like may be used and can be interchangeable depending on the context. If a meaning or definition is given, such meaning or definition controls.

One or more elements in examples described herein may be implemented as modules. A module may be an element that performs a defined function and/or that has a defined interface to other elements. The modules may be implemented in hardware, software in combination with hardware, firmware, wetware (e.g., hardware with a biological element) or a combination thereof, all of which may be behaviorally equivalent. For example, modules may be implemented as a software routine written in a computer language configured to be executed by a hardware machine (such as C, C++, Fortran, Java, Basic, Matlab or the like) or a modeling/simulation program such as Simulink, Stateflow, GNU Octave, or Lab VIEWMathScript. Additionally or alternatively, it may be possible to implement modules using physical hardware that incorporates discrete or programmable analog, digital and/or quantum hardware. Examples of programmable hardware may comprise: computers, microcontrollers, microprocessors, application-specific integrated circuits (ASICs); field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs); and/or complex programmable logic devices (CPLDs). Computers, microcontrollers and/or microprocessors may be programmed using languages such as assembly, C, C++ or the like. FPGAs, ASICs and CPLDs are often programmed using hardware description languages (HDL), such as VHSIC hardware description language (VHDL) or Verilog, which may configure connections between internal hardware modules with lesser functionality on a programmable device. The above-mentioned technologies may be used in combination to achieve the result of a functional module.

One or more features described herein may be implemented in a computer-usable data and/or computer-executable instructions, such as in one or more program modules, executed by one or more computers or other devices. Generally, program modules include routines, programs, objects, components, data structures, etc. that perform particular tasks or implement particular abstract data types when executed by a processor in a computer or other data processing device. The computer executable instructions may be stored on one or more computer readable media such as a hard disk, optical disk, removable storage media, solid state memory, RAM, etc. The functionality of the program modules may be combined or distributed as desired. The functionality may be implemented in whole or in part in firmware or hardware equivalents such as integrated circuits, field programmable gate arrays (FPGA), and the like. Particular data structures may be used to more effectively implement one or more features described herein, and such data structures are contemplated within the scope of computer executable instructions and computer-usable data described herein.

A non-transitory tangible computer readable media may comprise instructions executable by one or more processors configured to cause operations of multi-carrier communications described herein. An article of manufacture may comprise a non-transitory tangible computer readable machine-accessible medium having instructions encoded thereon for enabling programmable hardware to cause a device (e.g., a wireless device, wireless communicator, a wireless device, a base station, and the like) to allow operation of multi-carrier communications described herein. The device, or one or more devices such as in a system, may include one or more processors, memory, interfaces, and/or the like. Other examples may comprise communication networks comprising devices such as base stations, wireless devices or user equipment (wireless device), servers, switches, antennas, and/or the like. A network may comprise any wireless technology, including but not limited to, cellular, wireless, WiFi, 4G, 5G, any generation of 3GPP or other cellular standard or recommendation, any non-3GPP network, wireless local area networks, wireless personal area networks, wireless ad hoc networks, wireless metropolitan area networks, wireless wide area networks, global area networks, satellite networks, space networks, and any other network using wireless communications. Any device (e.g., a wireless device, a base station, or any other device) or combination of devices may be used to perform any combination of one or more of steps described herein, including, for example, any complementary step or steps of one or more of the above steps.

Although examples are described above, features and/or steps of those examples may be combined, divided, omitted, rearranged, revised, and/or augmented in any desired manner Various alterations, modifications, and improvements will readily occur to those skilled in the art. Such alterations, modifications, and improvements are intended to be part of this description, though not expressly stated herein, and are intended to be within the spirit and scope of the descriptions herein. Accordingly, the foregoing description is by way of example only, and is not limiting. 

1. A method comprising: receiving, by a wireless device, a message associated with a configured uplink grant, wherein the message comprises: a first sounding reference signal (SRS) resource indicator (SRI) indicating a first SRS resource of a first SRS resource set; and a second SRI indicating a second SRS resource of a second SRS resource set different from the first SRS resource set; transmitting, based on the first SRI, at least one transport block associated with the configured uplink grant; and transmitting, based on the second SRI, at least one repetition of the transport block.
 2. The method of claim 1, wherein the transmitting the at least one transport block comprises transmitting the at least one transport block using a first spatial domain transmission filter associated with a first spatial relation of the first SRS resource, and wherein the transmitting the at least one repetition of the transport block comprises transmitting the at least one repetition of the transport block using a second spatial domain transmission filter associated with a second spatial relation of the second SRS resource.
 3. The method of claim 1, further comprising receiving at least one configuration parameter for a cell, wherein the at least one configuration parameter indicates: the first SRS resource set; and the second SRS resource set.
 4. The method of claim 1, further comprising: determining, based on the first SRS resource, a first spatial domain transmission filter for the transmitting the at least one transport block; and determining, based on the second SRS resource, a second spatial domain transmission filter for the transmitting the at least one repetition of the transport block.
 5. The method of claim 1, further comprising receiving an activation command indicating, for the first SRS resource, a first spatial relation associated with a first spatial domain transmission filter, wherein the transmitting the at least one transport block comprises transmitting the at least one transport block using the first spatial domain transmission filter.
 6. The method of claim 1, wherein the transmitting the at least one transport block comprises transmitting the at least one transport block using a first spatial domain transmission filter associated with a first default transmission configuration indication (TCI) state, and wherein the transmitting the at least one repetition of the transport block comprises transmitting the at least one repetition of the transport block using a second spatial domain transmission filter associated with a second default TCI state.
 7. The method of claim 1, wherein: the transmitting the at least one transport block comprises transmitting at least one first physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) transmission during at least one first transmission occasion; and the transmitting the at least one repetition of the transport block comprises transmitting at least one second PUSCH transmission during at least one second transmission occasion that is different from the at least one first transmission occasion.
 8. A method comprising: receiving, by a wireless device, a downlink control information (DCI) message scheduling transmission of a transport block, wherein the DCI message comprises: a first sounding reference signal (SRS) resource indicator (SRI) indicating a first SRS resource of a first SRS resource set; and a second SRI indicating a second SRS resource of a second SRS resource set different from the first SRS resource set; and transmitting, based on the first SRI, the transport block; and transmitting, based on the second SRI, at least one repetition of the transport block.
 9. The method of claim 8, wherein the transmitting the transport block comprises transmitting the transport block using a first spatial domain transmission filter associated with a first spatial relation of the first SRS resource, and wherein the transmitting the at least one repetition of the transport block comprises transmitting the at least one repetition of the transport block using a second spatial domain transmission filter associated with a second spatial relation of the second SRS resource.
 10. The method of claim 8, further comprising receiving at least one configuration parameter for a cell, wherein the at least one configuration parameter indicates: the first SRS resource set; and the second SRS resource set.
 11. The method of claim 8, further comprising: determining, based on the first SRS resource, a first spatial domain transmission filter for the transmitting the transport block; and determining, based on the second SRS resource, a second spatial domain transmission filter for the transmitting the at least one repetition of the transport block.
 12. The method of claim 8, further comprising receiving an activation command indicating, for the first SRS resource, a first spatial relation associated with a first spatial domain transmission filter, wherein the transmitting the transport block comprises transmitting the transport block using the first spatial domain transmission filter.
 13. The method of claim 8, wherein: the transmitting the transport block comprises transmitting at least one first physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) transmission during at least one first transmission occasion; and the transmitting the at least one repetition of the transport block comprises transmitting at least one second PUSCH transmission during at least one second transmission occasion that is different from the at least one first transmission occasion.
 14. The method of claim 8, further comprising: determining that the first SRS resource is not associated with a spatial relation and that the second SRS resource is not associated with a spatial relation, wherein the transmitting the transport block is further based on a first transmission configuration indicator (TCI) state, and wherein the transmitting the at least one repetition of the transport block is further based on a second TCI state different from the first TCI state.
 15. A method comprising: receiving, by a wireless device, a message scheduling transmission of a transport block, wherein the message comprises: a first sounding reference signal (SRS) resource indicator (SRI) indicating a first SRS resource of a first SRS resource set; and a second SRI indicating a second SRS resource of a second SRS resource set different from the first SRS resource set; transmitting, based on the first SRI and during at least one first transmission occasion, the transport block; and transmitting, based on the second SRI and during at least one second transmission occasion different from the first transmission occasion, at least one repetition of the transport block.
 16. The method of claim 15, wherein the message comprises at least one of: a configured uplink grant; or a downlink control information (DCI) message.
 17. The method of claim 15, wherein the transmitting the transport block comprises transmitting the transport block using a first spatial domain transmission filter associated with a first spatial relation of the first SRS resource, and wherein the transmitting the at least one repetition of the transport block comprises transmitting the at least one repetition of the transport block using a second spatial domain transmission filter associated with a second spatial relation of the second SRS resource.
 18. The method of claim 15, further comprising receiving at least one configuration parameter for a cell, wherein the at least one configuration parameter indicates: the first SRS resource set; and the second SRS resource set.
 19. The method of claim 15, further comprising: determining, based on the first SRS resource, a first spatial domain transmission filter for the transmitting the transport block; and determining, based on the second SRS resource, a second spatial domain transmission filter for the transmitting the at least one repetition of the transport block.
 20. The method of claim 15, further comprising receiving an activation command indicating, for the first SRS resource, a first spatial relation associated with a first spatial domain transmission filter, wherein the transmitting the transport block comprises transmitting the transport block using the first spatial domain transmission filter. 